Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
OWNER’S MANUAL
21_WK_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
2021 GRAND CHEROKEE
2021 GRAND CHEROKEE
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 8
2
GET
TING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................15
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................79
4
STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 99
5
MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................170
6
SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 255
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................308
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................329
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 385
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................392
11
INDEX .............................................................................................................................................396
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key............................................................ 9
ROLLOVER WARNING ........................................... 9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........10
Symbol Glossary...................................................10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................15
Key Fob......................................................... 15
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................17
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................18
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................18
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................19
How To Use Remote Start ...........................19
To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 20
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped ................................................... 21
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 21
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped.............................. 22
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped ................................................... 22
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED....22
To Arm The System ..................................... 22
To Disarm The System ................................22
Rearming Of The System............................. 23
Security System Manual Override ..............23
Tamper Alert................................................. 23
DOORS................................................................... 23
Manual Door Locks...................................... 23
Power Door Locks ....................................... 24
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .......... 24
Locking The Doors With One Or More
Doors Open .................................................. 27
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit................. 27
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........ 27
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ................................................... 27
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 28
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................ 28
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................. 29
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ....... 29
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .. 30
Programming The Memory Feature............ 30
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory ........................................................ 31
Memory Position Recall............................... 31
SEATS ................................................................... 31
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped ...................................................... 32
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 33
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 35
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...................... 36
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ........ 37
Head Restraints .......................................... 38
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ......................40
Introducing Voice Recognition.................... 40
Basic Voice Commands .............................. 41
Get Started................................................... 41
Additional Information................................. 41
MIRRORS ..............................................................42
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 42
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................... 42
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 43
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped ...................................................... 43
Power Mirrors .............................................. 43
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped................................................... 44
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 44
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped................................................... 44
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) ......................................................45
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.................................................. 45
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....... 45
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 45
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener................................................. 46
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ................................. 47
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................... 47
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 47
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................48
Headlight Switch .........................................48
Multifunction Lever ..................................... 49
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ..................49
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 49
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped.......... 49
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................50
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..........50
Parking Lights And Panel Lights .................50
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ............. 50
Headlight Delay............................................51
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 51
Fog Lights — If Equipped .............................51
Turn Signals ................................................. 51
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 51
Automatic Headlight Leveling —
If Equipped ................................................... 51
Battery Saver................................................52
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................52
Interior Courtesy Lights ............................... 52
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............53
Windshield Wiper Operation ......................53
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 54
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 55
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................56
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions .............................................. 56
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......59
Climate Voice Commands ...........................60
Operating Tips ............................................. 60
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 62
Storage ......................................................... 62
USB/AUX Control — If Equipped.................. 63
Power Outlets............................................... 64
Power Inverter — If Equipped...................... 66
WINDOWS............................................................. 67
Power Window Controls .............................. 67
Automatic Window Features ...................... 67
Reset Auto-Up .............................................. 68
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 68
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 68
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .................... 68
Opening And Closing The Sunroof.............. 69
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 69
Venting Sunroof — Express ......................... 69
Sunshade Operation.................................... 70
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 70
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED........................................ 70
Opening And Closing The Sunroof.............. 70
Opening And Closing The Power
Sunshade ..................................................... 71
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 72
Venting Sunroof ........................................... 72
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 72
HOOD .................................................................... 72
To Open The Hood ....................................... 72
To Close The Hood....................................... 72
LIFTGATE ............................................................... 73
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate...................... 73
To Lock/Close The Liftgate ......................... 73
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ..................... 74
Cargo Area Features ................................... 75
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE ................79
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 80
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......................80
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ........................................................ 81
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped ................. 82
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ... 83
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions (If Equipped) ................................... 86
TRIP COMPUTER...................................................88
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..................88
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 88
Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 91
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................ 94
Green Indicator Lights................................. 95
White Indicator Lights ................................. 96
Blue Indicator Lights ................................... 97
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .......97
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ............................................... 97
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................................................98
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .......................................99
Automatic Transmission.............................. 99
Normal Starting ........................................... 99
AutoPark.....................................................100
If Engine Fails To Start ..............................102
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C) ..................................................102
After Starting..............................................102
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ....... 102
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 103
PARKING BRAKE .............................................. 103
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................ 105
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................106
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System ............................................106
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode .......................106
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission .....107
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED.......................... 112
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION.................... 112
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped ........................112
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped ........................113
Shift Positions ............................................113
Shifting Procedures ...................................114
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped......114
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED...........................115
Description.................................................115
Air Suspension Modes...............................117
Instrument Cluster Display Messages .....117
Operation....................................................117
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED .....................119
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection...................119
Instrument Cluster Display Messages .....119
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................................................120
POWER STEERING .............................................120
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............120
Autostop Mode...........................................120
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................121
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode...........................................................121
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System........................................................122
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System........................................................122
System Malfunction...................................122
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................122
Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................122
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped.................................................124
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................................. 134
ParkSense Sensors ...................................135
ParkSense Display.....................................135
ParkSense Warning Display......................138
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .......... 138
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................138
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............139
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....139
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................... 140
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System .........................141
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation ................................142
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 144
LaneSense Operation................................144
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................145
LaneSense Warning Message.................. 145
Changing LaneSense Status.....................147
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 147
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................. 149
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ........149
VEHICLE LOADING............................................. 150
Certification Label .....................................150
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 151
Common Towing Definitions .....................151
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................153
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)..........................................154
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped .................................................155
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................155
Towing Requirements ...............................156
Towing Tips ................................................159
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ................................................... 160
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................160
Recreational Towing — Two Wheel Drive
Models........................................................161
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel
Drive Models ..............................................161
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/
Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................161
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 164
On-Road Driving Tips .................................164
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................165
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 170
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 170
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................171
Customer Programmable Features ..........171
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ..............................187
System Overview .......................................187
Drag & Drop Menu Bar..............................189
Safety And General Information ...............189
UCONNECT MODES............................................190
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................190
Radio Mode ...............................................191
Media Mode ..............................................199
Phone Mode ..............................................201
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................................................213
Android Auto™ ..........................................213
Apple CarPlay®..........................................215
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks...................................................217
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................218
Is My Vehicle Connected?.........................218
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................218
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................220
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ......................222
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account.......................................................237
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 237
Connected Services SOS FAQs ................237
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Unlock FAQs ..............................................238
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs ..........................................................238
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....238
Connected Services Vehicle Finder
FAQs ..........................................................239
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs .......................................239
Connected Services Remote Vehicle
Start FAQs .................................................239
Connected Services Remote Horn &
Lights FAQs ................................................240
Connected Services Account FAQs...........240
Data Collection & Privacy..........................242
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .................. 243
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................243
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................244
Suspension ................................................244
Pitch & Roll.................................................245
Accessory Gauges .....................................245
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ......................245
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED......................... 246
Getting Started...........................................246
Dual Video Screen .....................................247
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc ..................................247
Play External Device ..................................249
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System........................................................250
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control.......250
Headphones Operation .............................251
Controls ......................................................251
Replacing The Headphone Batteries........252
Accessibility — If Equipped........................252
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty .....................................................252
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 254
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 255
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................255
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light ............................................................256
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...256
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 265
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped .................................................265
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation ...................................................269
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................................271
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..................275
Occupant Restraint Systems Features.....275
Important Safety Precautions...................275
Seat Belt Systems .....................................276
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...284
Child Restraints .........................................293
SAFETY TIPS .......................................................304
Transporting Passengers ..........................304
Transporting Pets ......................................305
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................305
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ........................306
Exhaust Gas ..............................................307
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................307
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................308
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ....308
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................312
Preparations For Jacking ..........................312
Jack Location .............................................313
Spare Tire Stowage — If Equipped ...........313
Jacking Instructions ..................................314
JUMP STARTING ................................................318
Preparations For Jump Start.....................318
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................319
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 321
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 321
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................. 322
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 323
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 324
Two-Wheel Drive Models...........................326
Four-Wheel Drive Models..........................326
Tow Eye Usage — If Equipped ...................327
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .....328
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 328
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 329
Maintenance Plan .....................................330
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 333
3.6L Engine................................................333
5.7L Engine................................................334
Checking Oil Level .....................................335
Adding Washer Fluid ................................335
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................335
Pressure Washing......................................336
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................................. 336
Engine Oil ..................................................336
Engine Oil Filter..........................................337
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................338
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................339
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................341
Body Lubrication........................................342
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................342
Exhaust System ........................................345
Cooling System .........................................346
Brake System ............................................349
Automatic Transmission............................350
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................351
Transfer Case ............................................352
FUSES .........................................................352
BULB REPLACEMENT ................................358
TIRES ................................................................... 362
Tire Safety Information..............................362
Tires — General Information .....................371
Tire Types ...................................................375
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................376
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................378
Snow Traction Devices ..............................379
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............380
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................. 381
Treadwear ..................................................381
Traction Grades .........................................381
Temperature Grades .................................381
STORING THE VEHICLE......................................382
BODYWORK ........................................................382
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......382
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........382
Preserving The Bodywork..........................382
INTERIORS .........................................................383
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................383
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................384
Leather Surfaces .......................................384
Glass Surfaces ..........................................384
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER.................385
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................385
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................385
Torque Specifications................................385
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................386
3.6L Engine................................................386
5.7L Engine................................................386
Reformulated Gasoline .............................386
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................387
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................387
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................387
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...388
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................388
Fuel System Cautions................................388
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................. 389
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 390
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS............... 391
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 392
Prepare For The Appointment ..................392
Prepare A List.............................................392
Be Reasonable With Requests.................392
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 392
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................392
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........392
Mexico ........................................................393
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............393
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY)...................................................393
Service Contract .......................................393
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 394
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 394
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 394
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................394
In Canada...................................................394
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 394
General Information.......................................... 395
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on the purchase of your Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and
high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle is designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for
a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you operate this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those
used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case operation. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience. When driving off-road, or operating the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 164.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of
the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its
validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts,
and care about your satisfaction.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this
vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle
safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major
cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the
universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNING!
These statements are against
operating procedures that could result
in a collision, bodily injury and/or
death
.
CAUTION!
These statements are against
procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve
installation, operation, and reliability. If
not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions
on easier use of the product or
functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional
information on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant
information pertaining to the topic.
1
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 81.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 88
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 88
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 89
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 89
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
Ú page 89
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
Ú page 89
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Ú page 90
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 90
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 90
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 90
Red Warning Lights
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 90
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 90
Transmission Temperature
Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 91
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 91
Red Warning Lights
Yellow Warning Lights
Service Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Warning Light
Ú page 91
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
Ú page 91
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 91
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
OFF Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 92
Service LaneSense Warning Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 92
LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 92
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 92
1
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 92
Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 92
Service 4WD Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 93
Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
Ú page 93
Service Stop/Start System
Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 93
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 93
Yellow Warning Lights
Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Active Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 94
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 94
Air Suspension Aerodynamic
Height Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 94
Air Suspension Off-Road 1
Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 94
Air Suspension Off-Road 2
Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 95
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 95
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
4WD Low Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 95
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 95
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With No Target Detected Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 95
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With Target Light — If Equipped
Ú page 95
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 95
Front Fog Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 95
Yellow Indicator Lights
LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 96
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 95
Snow Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 95
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 95
Tow Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 96
Track Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 96
Green Indicator Lights
1
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Ready Light — If Equipped
Ú page 96
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Light
Ú page 96
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 96
Selec-Speed Control Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 96
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 97
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped),
Remote Start (if equipped), and remote power
liftgate operation. The key fob allows you to lock
or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances
up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system. The key fob also contains
an emergency key, which is stored in the rear of
the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked
if the key fob is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device.
This may result in poor performance.
With ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow
Ú page 395.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all the doors and
the liftgate. To lock all the doors and the liftgate,
push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — PANIC Button
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob,
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and the security system
will arm (if equipped).
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate
is open, the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock again automatically if the key is left
inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button through
Uconnect Settings Ú page 171.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding
the emergency key release (1) on the back
of the key fob and pull the emergency key
out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry
the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
3. Remove the back cover to access and
replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the (+) sign on the battery to
the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off
in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to
start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key Ú page 395.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
power windows)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available (e.g.
climate controls, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the
brake pedal)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode
by pushing the button, the key fob may have a
low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
When opening the driver's door with the igni-
tion in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition
in the OFF position. In addition to the chime,
the message will display “Ignition Or Acces-
sory On” in the cluster.
For more information on proper engine
starting procedures, see Ú page 99.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the remote start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then,
the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain
in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and with a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob in
the vehicle, press the brake pedal and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will Remote Start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, either push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the vehicle security system
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems
— If Equipped” in the next section for detailed
operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if selected in
the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 171. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when the remote start is activated and
is selected in the comfort menu screen. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically
adjusted to the optimal temperature and mode
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature. This will occur until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level Mode, with Recirculation
on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 56.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings
will change if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in remote start mode, and
exit automatic override. This includes the OFF
button on the climate controls, which will turn
the system off.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled.
Exiting remote start will resume previous
operation, except if the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer
timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE — IF
E
QUIPPED
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position Ú page 395.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized
operation. While the Vehicle Security system is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security system
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 24.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 24.
Place the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of
the door key cylinder when the system is
armed will sound the alarm when the door is
opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
when the power liftgate is opened using the
liftgate button on the key fob. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
opens any door from the inside, the alarm will
sound.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to
unlock the liftgate, the Vehicle Security
system is disarmed and the rest of the
vehicle doors will remain locked unless
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is selected in the
Passive Entry settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm, regardless of whether you are
in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five
seconds between cycles, and up to eight cycles
if the trigger remains active. The Vehicle
Security system will then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the vehicle security
system in your absence, the horn will sound
three times and the exterior lights will blink
three times when you disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the
door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are found inside the vehicle when the door
lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even
if the key is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door
may not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle without first unlocking
the door. The door may be unlocked manually
by raising the lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 171.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Passive Entry system from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever time duration
is set between 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90
seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates
two flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm
the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock
all doors and the liftgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
programmed all doors will unlock when you
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle.
You can select between “Unlock Driver Door
1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 171.
All doors will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless
of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
There are five situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in
pre-arm or armed status and the liftgate tran-
sitions from opened to closed.
When the liftgate transitions from open to
closed and remote start is active.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive
Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock
the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Uconnect Settings, the key protection
described in "Frequency Operated Button
Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/
functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to
open.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will
open with the handle and no key fob is
required.
If the vehicle is locked, and the liftgate is
unlocked by using Passive Entry, the vehicle
doors will remain locked (unless “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press” is selected in the Passive
Entry settings).
The liftgate (and vehicle doors if unlocked)
must be locked using the lock button on the
key fob, the Passive Entry lock button, or the
lock buttons on the interior front door panels.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive
Entry Location
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located on the outside liftgate door
handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate Ú page 395.
LOCKING THE DOORS WITH ONE OR
M
ORE DOORS OPEN
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and
the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following
sequence of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled within Uconnect
Settings
Ú
page 171.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
is enabled/disabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 171.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping control is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control
To unlock the steering column, push the control
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the
control upward until fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column control
is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering
column.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings Ú page 30, you can use your key fob or
the memory switch on the driver's door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering
column to pre-programmed positions.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
E
QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through
a memory switch. Each memory profile saves
desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if
equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
each can be linked to either memory position
1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory setting switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, and then push the desired
memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to
recall a memory profile.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
note:
Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system Ú page 171.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release
button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button number
(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob
linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual
front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by
the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar
located under the seat cushion and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor
position, lift the recline lever and push the
seatback forward. To return to the seating
position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back and
release the lever at the desired position. To
return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward
and release the lever.
Rear Seat Recline
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be properly adjusted,
and you could be severely injured or killed.
Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is
parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the seat belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could
slide under the seat belt and be severely
injured or killed. Use the recliner only when
the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to
allow for extended cargo space and still
maintain some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat-
back to fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release
the seat.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE:
Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the
left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the
right outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If
interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have
difficulty returning the seat to its proper
position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used
as a play area by children when the vehicle
is in motion. They could be seriously injured
in a collision. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
(Continued)
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The
power seat switches are located on the outboard
side of the seat. There are two switches that
control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down using the power seat switch. The
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using the power seat
switch. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or
downward on the switch will raise and lower the
position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile Ú page 30.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or
disabled through the programmable features in
the Uconnect system Ú page 171.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen and the controls screen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
The indicator arrows in the touchscreen buttons
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
arrows will illuminate for HI, and one for LO.
Turning the heating elements off will return the
user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats
may be equipped with heated seats. There are
two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. Indicator lights in each switch indicate
the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
Push the switch once to turn the HI setting
on.
Push the switch a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Push the switch a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The ventilated seats are equipped with fans
that can be controlled through the climate and
control screen in the Uconnect system. The fans
operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints —
Front Seats
Active Head Restraints (AHR) are passive,
deployable components, and vehicles with this
equipment cannot be readily identified by any
markings, only through visual inspection of the
head restraint. The AHRs will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to reduce the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver
or front passenger in certain types of rear
impacts. For more information, see
Ú page 275.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be
tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head
restraint closer to the back of your head, pull
forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push
rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to
move the head restraint away from your head.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
(Continued)
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see an authorized dealer.
In the event of deployment of an Active Head
Restraint, see Ú page 275.
Adjustment — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are
not adjustable. They automatically fold forward
when the rear seat is folded to a load floor
position, but do not return to their normal
position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position,
raise the head restraint until it locks in place.
The outboard head restraints are not
removable.
Returning Rear Head Restraint
The center head restraint has limited
adjustment. Lift upward on the head restraint to
raise it, or push downward on the head restraint
to lower it.
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats
The center head restraint can be adjusted when
occupied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go by pulling upward. Then, push the
release button at the base of the post while
pulling the head restraint upward. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust
the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants.
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a colli-
sion.
Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental
deployment of the Active Head Restraint
ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose
cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is
deployed.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Center Head Restraint Release Button
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see
Ú page 275.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the outboard head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to
be occupied.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your VR
system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen.
GET STARTED
The Voice Recognition (VR) button is used to
activate/deactivate your Voice Recognition
system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push the Voice Recognition (VR)
button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 395.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian.html or call:
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian-v1/ or call: 1-877-324-9091
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror— If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Manual Mirror Adjustment
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve the driver’s rear view.
You can turn the Automatic Dimming Mirror
feature on or off by pushing the button at the
base of the mirror. A light in the button will
illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature
is activated.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Button
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent
positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The outside mirrors will automatically dim for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming
mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select
button for the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory
Settings Feature Ú page 30.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on
side convex mirrors could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance
of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Left Mirror Selection
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward
and unfolded into the normal driving position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches
L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and
the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second
time and the mirrors will return to the normal
driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
cycle, a potential extra button push is required
to get the mirrors back to the normal driving
position. If the mirror does not fold
automatically, check for ice or dirt build up at
the pivot area, which can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors
are closed, and the doors are locked).
If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they
will unfold when the ignition is placed in the
ON position.
If the exterior mirrors were manually folded
(by hand or by pushing the power folding
mirror switch), they will not automatically
unfold.
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 171.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-
tion.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple attempts). This resets them to
their normal driving position.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 56.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — IF
E
QUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with
memory settings, this feature will be linked to
the programmable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 171.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting, or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button Ú page 395.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
these steps:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional
buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Follow the procedure on programming
HomeLink® to a garage door opener
Ú page 46. Be sure to determine if the device
has a rolling code, or non-rolling code before
beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
of transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during program-
ming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate
operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all
remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some US gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel, next to the steering
wheel. The headlight switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, cargo lights, and fog
lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Push Front Fog Light
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-
light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that
are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt,
wash with a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) (low
intensity) come on whenever the engine is
running, and the transmission is not in the
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or
the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on
the same side of the vehicle will turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation.
Once the turn signal is no longer active, the
DRL lamp will illuminate.
The DRLs function may be disabled through
the Uconnect system Ú page 171.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automatically controlling the high
beams through the use of a camera mounted
on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until
the approaching vehicle is out of view.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive
materials to clean the lenses.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto High Beam” within your
Uconnect Settings Ú page 171, as well as
turning the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the
mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
to the A (auto) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic headlights off, turn the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 171.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensing
Wipers Ú page 54, and it is activated, the
headlights will automatically turn on after the
wipers complete five wipe cycles within
approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers
completely stop.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will auto-
matically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up
to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
cancelled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON
position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 171.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
A (auto) position when the ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, the vehicle will chime when the
driver’s door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or headlight
position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control.
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog
lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the
switch is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT LEVELING — IF
E
QUIPPED
This feature prevents the headlights from
interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers.
Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the
height of the headlight beam in reaction to
changes in vehicle pitch.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is in the OFF
position and any door is left open or the dimmer
control is rotated all the way up to the dome
light on position, the interior lights will
automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened or when the dimmer
control is rotated to its farthest upward position.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry and the unlock button is pushed on the
key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn
on. When a door is open and the interior lights
are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way
down, to the last (off) detent, will cause all the
interior lights to turn off. This is also known as
the “Party” mode because it allows the doors to
stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in
the overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch
on either side of the console. These buttons are
backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights
off, push the switch a second time. The lights
will also turn on when the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an
ambient light feature. This light illuminates for
improved visibility of the floor and center
console area.
Ambient Light
Dimmer Controls
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting
can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control
up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the
headlights are on you can supplement the
brightness of the instrument cluster display,
radio and overhead console by rotating the
control to the first detent up until you hear a
click. This feature is called “Parade” mode and
is useful when headlights are required during
the day. Rotating the dimmer control up to the
second detent, the furthest position up, turns
on the courtesy lights. This feature is known as
“Dome On”.
Dimmer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
Multifunction Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first
four detent positions for intermittent settings,
the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the
sixth detent for high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings
when weather conditions permit. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can
be regulated from a maximum of approximately
18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a
cycle every one second (fourth detent). If the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever
(toward the steering wheel) and hold. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting,
the wipers will turn on and operate for several
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and
then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
Windshield Washer Operation
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate for
several cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the washer will
resume normal operation.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the
MIST position and release for a single wiping
cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 342.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to one of four detent positions to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay detent position four is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the
windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 171.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the automatic trans-
mission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL posi-
tion.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is
operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for
intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the third detent to activate
the washer. The washer will continue
to operate as long as the switch is
held.
Rotate the center portion downward from the
OFF position to activate the rear washer. The
washer will continue to operate as long as the
switch is held.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will
resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “park” position.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate
Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
into the cabin.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the system
between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the current
setting. The AUTO indicator
illuminates when AUTO is on. This feature
automatically controls the interior cabin
temperature by adjusting distribution and
amount of airflow. Toggling this function will
cause the system to switch between manual
mode and automatic modes Ú page 59.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen
button, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Up And Down
Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the Up button on the faceplate
or press and slide the temperature
bar towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the Down button on the
faceplate or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when SYNC is on. SYNC is
used to synchronize the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
be selected using either the blower control knob
on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted
so air comes from the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Climate Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 171.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of
the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to
70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 382.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control
system may automatically adjust airflow to
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is
activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is
active, the de-icer timer and operation will
continue.
Operating Tips Chart
NOTE:
The below chart is for Manual Override Opera-
tion, otherwise run in AUTO.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to the (Panel
Mode) position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode)
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Mix Mode)
position and turn on
(A/C) to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the (Floor
Mode) position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
(Mix Mode) position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door
panels for easy access.
Console Features
The center console contains both an upper and
a lower storage area.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull
upward on the small latch located on the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to
access the lower storage compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Overhead Console
The overhead console contains courtesy/
reading lights and storage for sunglasses.
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®),
power liftgate and power sunroof/sunshade
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console, a compartment is
provided for storing a pair of sunglasses. The
storage compartment access is a “push/push”
design. Push the pad on the door to open. Push
the chrome pad on the door to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
USB/AUX C ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Connecting The External USB/AUX Device
Use the connection cable to connect an external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector
port which is located in the center console.
The USB ports on the media hub are equipped
with a Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator
(Smart Charge) feature. This feature allows a
device to charge for up to one hour after the
vehicle is powered off.
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB
Once the audio device is connected and
synchronized to the vehicle’s USB control
system (an external USB device may take a few
minutes to connect), the audio device starts
charging and is ready for use.
NOTE:
If the audio device battery is completely
discharged, it may not communicate with the
USB control system until a minimum charge is
attained. Leaving the audio device connected to
1 — USB Port One
2 — AUX Port
3 — USB Port Two
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the USB control system can charge it to the
required level.
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to
the USB port:
The audio device can be played on the
vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata
(artist, track title, album, etc.) information on
the radio display.
The audio device can be controlled using the
radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the
contents.
The audio device battery charges when
plugged into the USB connector (if supported
by the specific audio device).
NOTE:
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Second Row USB Charging Port
Second row USB connector ports can be used
for charging purposes only. Use the connection
cable to connect an external USB device to the
charging ports which are located on the rear of
the center console.
Rear Center Console USB Ports
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery
and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area on the center stack of the
instrument panel. Push inward on the storage
lid to open the compartment and gain access to
this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
(Continued)
In addition to the front power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the storage area
of the center console.
Center Console Outlet
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear power outlet can be switched from
“ignition” only to constant “battery” powered all
the time. See your local authorized dealer for
details.
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Con-
sole Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Instru-
ment Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
NOTE:
Certain video game consoles, new computers
and power tools will exceed this power limit.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window controls on
the passenger door trim panel. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
If equipped, the key fob may also be used to
raise or lower vehicle windows while the ignition
is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is program-
mable within Uconnect Settings Ú page 171.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period
of time, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again (the indicator light on the
button will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF — EXPRESS
Push and release the Vent button within
one-half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent” and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open automatically
as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to
the left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed automatic
stops for the sunroof open position; a comfort
stop position and a full open position. The
comfort stop position has been optimized to
minimize wind buffeting.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically.
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated
the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
UNSHADE
The sunshade has two programmed positions:
half open and full open positions. When
operating the sunshade from the closed
position, the sunshade will always stop at the
half open position regardless of express or
manual open operation. The switch must be
actuated again to continue on to full open
position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at
half open position will first automatically close
the sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward and
release it within one-half second, the sunshade
will open to the half open position and stop
automatically. Push and release the switch
again from the half open position and the
sunshade will open to the full open position and
stop automatically.
Push the sunshade switch forward and release
it within one-half second and the sunshade will
close automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof
switches will stop the sunshade in a partially
open position.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward,
the sunshade will open to the half open position
and stop automatically. Push and hold the
sunshade switch again and the sunshade will
open to the full open position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunshade will close and stop at full closed
position.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in
motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open
position.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the "Vent" button within
one-half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will
automatically cycle to the halfway open position
prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent posi-
tion.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to
the left and lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the
hood open.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Key fob
Outside handle
Button on overhead console
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release handle. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate
release handle to open. Push the button on the
key fob twice within five seconds to release the
liftgate.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect, all doors will unlock when you push
the electronic liftgate release handle. If "Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 171, only the liftgate
will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate
release handle.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either front
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock
the liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors
and the driver's door lock cylinder will not lock
and unlock the liftgate.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate
closing handle and pull in a downward motion to
close the liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button located
next to the outside handle release will lock the
vehicle.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the
button, located in the upper left trim in the
liftgate opening. This button cannot be used to
open the liftgate.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec-
tronic liftgate release handle.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by
pushing the electronic liftgate release
handle Ú page 24, or by pushing the
liftgate button on the key fob. Push
the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open or close the power liftgate.
NOTE:
When using the liftgate button on the key fob
to open the liftgate while the vehicle is
locked, only the liftgate will unlock leaving
the other doors to remain locked. Closing the
liftgate will not re-lock the liftgate. The lock
button on the key fob, or the Passive Entry
lock button must be pushed to re-lock.
When using the Passive Entry button to open
the liftgate, and the vehicle doors unlock (if
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is selected in the
Passive Entry settings), the liftgate and
vehicle doors must be locked using the lock
button on the key fob, the Passive Entry lock
button, or the lock buttons on the interior
front door panels.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed
by pushing the liftgate button located on the
front overhead console. If the liftgate is fully
open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the
liftgate button located on the left rear trim
panel. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the
button again will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if
Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the
Uconnect Settings), and the liftgate chime will
be audible. The chime can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 171.
NOTE:
In the event of a power malfunction to the lift-
gate, an emergency liftgate latch release can
be used to open the liftgate. The emergency
liftgate latch release can be accessed
through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time, the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate func-
tionality.
NOTE:
The power liftgate will not operate in
temperatures below −22°F (−30°C) or
temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure
to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the
liftgate before pushing any of the power lift-
gate switches.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while
it is closing or opening, the liftgate will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open posi-
tion. After multiple obstructions in the same
cycle, the liftgate will automatically stop and
must be opened or closed manually.
There are also pinch sensors attached to the
side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere
along these strips will cause the liftgate to
return to the open position.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
If the liftgate is only partially open, push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice to operate
the liftgate.
If the electronic liftgate release handle is
pushed while the power liftgate is opening,
the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage Bins
There are up to four removable storage bins
located in the rear cargo area. There are two
storage bins located on either side of the cargo
area.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear
subwoofer, the storage bin on that side will not
be available.
Rear Storage Bin
Two additional storage bins are located under
the load floor. To access the lower storage bins,
raise the load floor and attach the tether strap
(attached to the bottom of the load floor) to the
liftgate opening.
Tether Strap
Rear Lower Storage Bins
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If
Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from
shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grab the cover at the center handle and
pull over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into
the slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo
cover in place.
Rear Cargo Cover
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo
area floor, should be used to safely secure
loads when the vehicle is moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the
vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around
in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the
cargo floor or in the passenger compartment.
Remove the cover from the vehicle when
taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors
for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden
stop or accident, a hook could pull loose
and allow the child seat to come loose. A
child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads which exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to
carry loads on vehicles equipped with a luggage
rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg),
and should be uniformly distributed over the
luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar crossbars
built specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be
sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the
attachments, located at the upper edge of each
crossbar, approximately eight turns using the
anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel
to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the
desired position, retighten with the wrench to
lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
To help control wind noise when the cross-
bars are not in use, place the front and rear
crossbars approximately 24 inches (61 cm)
apart. Optimal noise reduction can then be
achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
forward or rearward using increments of
1 inch (2.5 cm).
If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped),
you may experience interruption of satellite
radio reception. For improved satellite radio
reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar
over the satellite radio antenna.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to
sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, do not carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars installed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lbs (68 kg).
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
2
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Long loads which extend over the wind-
shield, such as wood panels or surfboards,
or loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection
between the surface of the roof and the
load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
The use of Sport Mode is not recommended
when using the Roof Luggage Rack to carry
a load.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
79
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Gasoline Instrument Cluster
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located Ú page 149.
5. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display Ú page 81.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the
display for viewing, and display the total miles
or kilometers in the odometer. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through the main menus and submenus. You
can access the specific information you want
and make selections and adjustments
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats Ú page 346.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
Instrument Cluster Display
1. The interactive display area to the left side
of the screen depicts which menus are
being accessed in the main display area.
2. The top line where reconfigurable telltales,
compass direction, outside temperature,
Time, Range MPG or Trip are displayed. This
also displays the speedometer when other
menu pages are displayed.
3. The main display area where the menus and
pop up messages are displayed.
4. The lower line where reconfigurable
telltales, menu name and menu page are
displayed.
The Main Menu items selectable in the driver
interactive display consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Terrain — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Stored Messages
Screen Setup
Speed Warning
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Driver Interactive Display
2 — Speedometer Display
3 — Main Display
4 — Menu Name And Menu Page
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow buttons
allows you to cycle through the Main Menu
Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows
you to cycle through the submenu items of the
Main menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the up / down or left / right
arrow button will loop the user through
the currently selected menu or options
presented on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main
menu will be displayed.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. To reset displayed/selected
features push and hold the OK button for two
seconds.
OIL CHANGE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display for five seconds after
a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK button. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer
to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start
the engine).
2. Navigate to “Oil Life” submenu in “Vehicle
Info” in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the main menu items for several features.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the driver interactive display
menu options until the desired menu is
reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
Main Gauge
Non - SRT
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the main gauge menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to select the analog or digital type
speedometer display. Push and release the OK
button to toggle units (mph or km/h) of the
speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to scroll through the information
submenus and push and release the OK button
to select or reset the submenus.
Terrain — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right or left arrow button to
display the Selec-Track or Drivetrain.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right or left arrow button to
display the Selec-Terrain, Air Suspension,
Drivetrain, and Wheel Articulation.
Non — SRT
Selec-Terrain: Displays messages concerning
Selec-Terrain status.
Air Suspension — If Equipped: Displays
messages concerning Air Suspension status.
NON — SRT
Tire Pressure Oil Pressure
Transmission
Temperature
Oil Life
Oil Temperature Battery Voltage
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Drivetrain: Displays information on drivetrain
status of Front Wheel Angle, T-Case, and Axle
Lock.
Wheel Articulation: Displays current wheel
articulation.
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If
Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC and LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on the
status of ACC and LaneSense.
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button
(located on the steering wheel) and the
following will display in the instrument cluster
display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity Ú page 124.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to
be met Ú page 144.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy Icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and hold the OK button to reset average
fuel economy feature.
Toggle left or right to select a display with
or without Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the
Range value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the Range
display will change to a “RANGE LOW”
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
message. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “RANGE LOW”
message and a new Range value will display.
Range cannot be reset through the OK
button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since
the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while
driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Toggle the
left or right arrow button to select Trip A
or Trip B. The Trip information will display the
following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down
arrow button on the steering wheel to
scroll to the Stop/Start menu in the
driver interactive display Ú page 120.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu Icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This
feature shows the number of stored warning
messages. Pushing the left or right arrow
button will allow you to scroll through the stored
messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Gear Display
Full
Single
Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Fuel Economy Average
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy Current
Trip A
Trip B
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Fuel Economy Average
Fuel Economy Current
Trip A
Trip B
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Cancel
Restore
Current Gear
On
Off
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Terrain (show/hide)
Driver Assist (show/hide)
Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Trip Info (show/hide)
Stop/Start
Audio (show/hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
Speed Warning
The menu with (show/hide) means user can
press OK button to choose show or hide this
menu on the instrument cluster display.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS (IF EQUIPPED )
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 89.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip A or Trip B icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display
(Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B).
Trip A/Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip
A/Trip B since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip
A/Trip B since the last reset.
Shows average fuel consumption for Trip
A/Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition
switch is in the ON or START position.
To Reset Trip A/B Function
Reset will only occur while a function is
selected. Push and hold the OK button to clear
the function being displayed.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display
first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid
level is low, or that there is a problem with the
Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 120.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK position.
The light should turn off. If the light remains on
with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service Ú page 321.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 275.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light
This light will turn on when the ACC
system is not operating and needs
service Ú page 124.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should
go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker
Ú page 144.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light
will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 335.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 269.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel
consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is actively
adjusting the ride height Ú page 115.
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light—
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
vehicle is automatically lowered from
ride height position downward for
easy entry and exit of the vehicle.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Aerodynamic setting Ú page 115.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Off-Road 1 setting Ú page 115.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Off-Road 2 setting Ú page 115.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that FCW is off Ú page 269.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD LOW mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels Ú page 112.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
4WD power transfer case is in the
NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the
powertrain.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is set and
there is no target vehicle detected
Ú page 124.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is detected
Ú page 124.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 122.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on
Ú page 48.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 144.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 48.
Snow Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Snow
Mode is active.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport
Mode is active Ú page 112.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode Ú page 120.
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tow Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Tow Mode
is active.
Track Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Track
Mode is active.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned
on, but not set Ú page 124.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise
control has been turned on, but not
set Ú page 122.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be
on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case
is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle
speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 144.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when
“Selec-Speed Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”, assure the
vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and push
the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD
II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 170.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
The OBD ll may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD ll
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Switch the ignition to the ON position, but
do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
99
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or
PARK (P) position before you can start the
engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any
driving gear.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the
parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the OFF mode, key fob is removed from
the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop and the engine is at idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button. The ignition will return to the OFF
mode.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with
vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the
transmission will automatically select PARK
and the engine will turn off, however the
ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT
the OFF mode). Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
3. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once will turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode.
4. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be
held for two seconds (or three short pushes in
a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode)
if the engine is turned off when the
transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the
ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in
the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and
the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”)
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode (instrument cluster will display “ON/
RUN”)
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode (instrument cluster will display “OFF”)
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle
could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at
the same time. If pressure is detected on both
pedals simultaneously, a warning message will
display in the instrument cluster Ú page 81.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK if the below occur. It
is a back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver
shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, The
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to
select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
instrument cluster display and on the shifter. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold
Weather" procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition
key in the RUN position, release the accelerator
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW
–22°F O
R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 318.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
3.6L Engine — Bundled and strapped behind
the engine air cleaner assembly.
5.7L Engine — Bundled and strapped in front
of the power distribution center.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle
operations will occur Ú page 390.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break-in period. Add
oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK (P) position.
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push
the parking brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the
brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch in the ON mode, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) MODE
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the
vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal
driving conditions. Push the “ECO” switch in the
center stack of the instrument panel to activate
or disable ECO mode. A light on the switch
indicates when ECO mode is disabled.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is
engaged, the vehicle control systems will
change the following:
The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension will
operate in "Aero" mode over a broader speed
range Ú page 115.
Some ECO mode functions may be tempo-
rarily inhibited based on temperature and
other factors.
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) — If
Equipped
The ANC system uses four microphones
embedded in the headliner to detect
undesirable exhaust noise, which sometimes
occurs when operating in specific driving
conditions such as ECO and Tow mode. An
on-board frequency generator creates
counteracting sound waves through the audio
system to help keep the vehicle quiet.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
EIGHT–SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
The transmission gear range is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster. To select a gear range, push the lock
button on the gear selector and move the
selector rearward or forward. To shift the
transmission out of PARK (P), the engine must
be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to
shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-cali-
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a
new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
ters).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to
the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and MANUAL (M) or SPORT
(S) (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick shift control.
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL or SPORT
(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position),
or tapping the shift paddles (+/-), (if equipped)
will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster Ú page 111.
Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3,
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the
DRIVE position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake
Shift the transmission into PARK
Turn the ignition OFF
Remove the key fob from the vehicle
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the selector all the way forward until it stops
and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
to select a lower gear Ú page 111. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
MANUAL (M) OR SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED
The MANUAL (M, +/-) or SPORT (S, +/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual
control of transmission shifting (also known as
AutoStick mode Ú page 111). Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
MANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) position will
manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument
cluster.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer):
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 160.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 324.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Shift Paddles
Operation
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear
selector (in the MANUAL or SPORT position), or
the shift paddles (if equipped), to manually shift
the transmission. To activate AutoStick mode,
move the gear selector into the MANUAL (M) or
SPORT (S) position (beside the DRIVE position),
or tap one of the shift paddles on the steering
wheel (if equipped). Tapping the (-) shift paddle
(if equipped) to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode
will retain the current gear. The current
transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
AutoStick mode has the following operational
benefits:
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to first gear when coming to a stop. After
a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is acceler-
ated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range,
SNOW mode, or SAND mode). Tapping (+) (at
a stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear.
Starting out in SECOND or THIRD gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle pressed (if equipped),
or holding the gear selector in the (-) position,
will downshift the transmission to the lowest
gear possible at the current speed.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+)
shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear selector
is already in DRIVE) until "D" is once again
indicated in the instrument cluster. You can
shift in or out of AutoStick at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode Button
Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode
feature. The engine, transmission, and steering
systems are all set to their SPORT settings.
SPORT Mode will provide improved throttle
response and modified transmission shift
points for an enhanced driving experience, as
well as a greater amount of steering feel. This
mode may be activated and deactivated by
pushing the SPORT button on the instrument
panel switch bank.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
QUADRA-TRAC I OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS /PRECAUTIONS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range
only) transfer case, which provides convenient
full-time four-wheel drive. No driver interaction
is required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC)
System, which combines standard ABS and
Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque
transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
conditions where 4WD LOW range is recom-
mended Ú page 165.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS /PRECAUTIONS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully
automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO
mode. The Quadra-Trac II transfer case provides
three mode positions:
4WD AUTO
NEUTRAL
4WD LOW
When additional traction is required, the 4WD
LOW position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that
of the 4WD AUTO position at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause damage
to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each 4WD system mode position, see the
information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is the default operating mode for
daily use.
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is used for towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle Ú page 160.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which
allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels while providing
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph
(0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON
position or the engine running, shift the
transmission into “N”, and push the “4WD
LOW” button once on the transfer case switch.
The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument
cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid
when the shift is complete.
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection
condition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below
3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in “N” Press 4 Low”
message will flash from the instrument cluster
display Ú page 81.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph
(0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON
position or the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD
LOW” button once on the transfer case switch.
The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument
cluster will flash and go out when the shift is
complete.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection
condition exists, a “For 4x4 High Slow Below
3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in NEUTRAL push
4 Low” message will flash from the instru-
ment cluster display Ú page 81.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped; however,
difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch
teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling
0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is
moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the
transfer case will not allow the shift.
QUADRA-DRIVE II SYSTEM — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Quadra-Drive II System features two torque
transfer couplings. The couplings include an
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear
axle and the Quadra-Trac II transfer case. The
ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no
driver input to operate. Under normal driving
conditions, the unit functions as a standard
axle, balancing torque evenly between left and
right wheels. With a traction difference between
left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a
speed difference. As one wheel begins to spin
faster than the other, torque will automatically
transfer from the wheel that has less traction, to
the wheel that has traction. While the transfer
case and axle coupling differ in design, their
operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II
transfer case shifting information, preceding
this section, for shifting this system.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides
full time load leveling capability along with the
benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the push
of a button. The vehicle will automatically raise
and lower the ride height to adapt to the
appropriate driving conditions. At higher
speeds, the vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic
ride height and when operating in off-road
modes, the vehicle will raise the ride height
accordingly. The buttons near the terrain switch
in the center console area can be used to set
preferred ride height to match the appropriate
conditions.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the stan-
dard position of the suspension and is meant
for normal driving.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approx-
imately 1.1 inches (28 mm)) – This is the
primary position for all off-road driving until
OR2 is needed. A smoother and more
comfortable ride will result. Push the “UP”
button once from the NRH position while the
vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h).
When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle
speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be auto-
matically lowered to NRH Ú page 164.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approx-
imately 2.2 inches (55 mm)) – This position
is intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, push the “UP” button twice from
the NRH position or once from the OR1 posi-
tion while vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle
height will be automatically lowered to OR1
Ú page 164.
1 — UP Button
2 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer
Selectable)
3 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer
Selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer
Selectable)
6 — DOWN Button
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inches (15 mm)) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the
vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph
(90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph (90 km/h).
The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode
if the vehicle speed remains between 20 mph
(32 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
below 20 mph (32 km/h). The vehicle will
enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed
if the vehicle is in “SPORT” mode.
Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 1.6 inches (40 mm) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
“DOWN” button once from (NRH) while the
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between
15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h)
for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/
Exit Mode change will be canceled. To exit
Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up” button once
while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle
over 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit
Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect
Touchscreen Radio. If this feature is enabled,
the vehicle will only lower if the gear selector is
in "PARK", the terrain switch is in "AUTO", the
transfer case is in "AUTO” and the vehicle level
should be either in Normal or Aero Mode. The
vehicle will not automatically lower if the air
suspension level is in OR2 or OR1. If the vehicle
is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM),
the lowering will be suppressed when the igni-
tion is switched OFF and the door is open to
prevent setting the alarm off.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the proper height based
on the position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The
height can be changed from the default
Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air
suspension buttons Ú page 119.
The system requires that the engine be running
for all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of
the doors, including the liftgate, must be closed.
If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle
is lowering the change will not be completed
until the open door(s) is/are closed.
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a
lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
headlights from incorrectly shining into
oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the
rear of the vehicle will move up first and then
the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front
will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed
that the air suspension system operates briefly;
this is normal. The system is correcting the
position of the vehicle to ensure a proper
appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the
Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a feature
which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled Ú page 171.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
NOTE:
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio Ú page 171.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes
to protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 171.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the
air suspension system has a feature which
automatically lowers the vehicle to entry/exit
ride height Ú page 171.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air
suspension system has a feature which will put
the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable
the automatic load leveling system
Ú page 171.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting
allows you to only display suspension warnings
Ú page 171.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
must be enabled Ú page 171.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
If equipped with a touchscreen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio Ú page 171.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 81.
OPERATION
The indicator lamps 2 through 5 will illuminate
to show the current position of the vehicle.
Flashing indicator lamps will show a position
which the system is working to achieve. When
raising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing
on the “UP” button, the highest flashing
indicator lamp is the position the system is
working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high
pressure volume of air to operate the system.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the
system, see an authorized dealer for service.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
indicators are flashing on the "DOWN" button
the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the “UP” button once will move the
suspension one position higher from the
current position, assuming all conditions are
met (i.e. engine running, speed below
threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pushed
multiple times. Each push will raise the
requested level by one position up to a
maximum position of OR2 or the highest
position allowed based on current conditions
(i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the
suspension one position lower from the current
level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e.
engine running, doors closed, speed below
threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can be
pressed multiple times. Each push will lower the
requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e.
vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
The indicator lamps and instrument cluster
display messages will operate the same for
automatic changes and user requested
changes.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 2, 3, and
4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR2.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3 and
4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR1.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp
4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
this position.
Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be illu-
minated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit
Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested while
vehicle speed is between 15 mph (24 km/h)
and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4 will
remain on solid and indicator lamp 5 will flash
as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce
speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept
below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will
turn off and indicator lamp 5 will flash until
Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point
indicator lamp 5 will go solid. If during the
height change to Entry/Exit Mode, the vehicle
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the
height change will be paused until the vehicle
speed either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h)
and the height change continues to Entry/
Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
and the vehicle height will return to NRH.
Entry/Exit Mode may be selected while the
vehicle is not moving provided that the
engine is still running and all doors remain
closed.
Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Transport Mode.
Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 2 and 5 will
be illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Tire/Jack Mode.
Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps
4 and 5 will be illuminated. Customer driving
will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance for all terrains.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain consists of the following
positions:
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off-road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. When
in SNOW mode (depending on certain oper-
ating conditions), the transmission may use
SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If
equipped with air suspension, the default
ride height for SNOW is Normal Ride Height
(NRH).
AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off-road.
Balances traction with seamless steering feel
to provide improved handling and accelera-
tion over two-wheel drive vehicles. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
SAND – Off-road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as SAND or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces.
The electronic brake controls are set to limit
traction control management of throttle and
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension,
the default ride height for SAND is Normal
Ride Height (NRH).
MUD – Off-road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as MUD. Driveline is
maximized for traction. Some binding may be
felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control
management of throttle and wheel spin. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to OR1.
ROCK – Off-road calibration is only available
in 4WD LOW range. The vehicle is raised (if
equipped with Air Suspension) for improved
ground clearance. Traction based tuning with
improved steerability for use on high traction
off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obsta-
cles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle
level will change to Off-Road 2. If the
Selec-Terrain switch is in ROCK mode, and
the transfer case is switched from 4WD LOW
to 4WD AUTO, the Selec-Terrain system will
return to AUTO.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 81.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions and
adjusts accordingly.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System
Ú page 171.
If the Electric Power Steering warning
icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE
SYSTEM” message is displayed within the
instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service Ú page 88.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, this indicates an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the
vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon
and message turn off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
driver ignition start. At that time, the system will
go into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 81.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in DRIVE (D) and
the brake pedal pressed.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. Situations when the engine will
not stop, include (but not limited to):
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Engine temp too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP.
Accelerator pedal input.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
Vehicle at a higher altitude.
Ambient temperature is outside operating
range.
Gear selector in MANUAL (M) mode.
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is pressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
Stop/Start related system malfunction.
4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “Stop/Start OFF” message will
appear in instrument cluster display within the
Stop/Start section, and the autostop function
will be disabled Ú page 81.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
an ON condition every time the ignition is turned
OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 88.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key
start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes that function differently. Always confirm
which mode is selected:
Cruise Control mode for cruising at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
NOTE:
Cruise Control will not detect vehicles directly
ahead of you. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear
in the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Cruise Control is on. To turn the system off,
push the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE
CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push and
release the SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at
the selected speed. Once a speed has been set,
a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h)” will appear indicating the set speed. A
cruise indicator lamp, along with set speed will
also appear and stay on in the instrument
cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always ensure the
system is off when you are not using it.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control system is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
switch in the OFF position erases the set speed
from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — I F
E
QUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. The
Cruise Control function performs differently
Ú page 122.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your Cruise
Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain a set
speed.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis / suspension or tire size modifi-
cations to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
NOTE:
Cruise Control will not detect vehicles directly
ahead of you. Always be aware of the mode
selected Ú page 395.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,
traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle
speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is
always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manu-
ally. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display shows the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
ESC Full Off mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In
addition, the proximity warning does not
activate and no alarm will sound even if you
are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be
sure to maintain a safe distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be
aware which mode is selected.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop longer than two seconds,
the system will cancel. The driver will have to
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a
standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed
by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set
With Target Detected Light. The system will then
adjust vehicle speed automatically to maintain
the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the distance set
by the driver until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 126.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a vehicle ahead, your
vehicle will resume motion, without any driver
interaction, if the vehicle ahead starts moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop
system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
The driver must now manually operate the
vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
the above message and the system will
deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and a
chime will sound when conditions temporarily
limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene. The
following are examples of these types of
situations:
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead
detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve
the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
ACC performance may be limited when driving
on hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your
lane depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the lane changing example below,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles,
traveling near the outer edges of the lane or
merging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved to the center of the lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear, and if equipped, the front
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-
ride automatic braking by changing the gear
or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if ESC is
not available.
Automatic brakes are not available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the Park-
Sense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not
enough to avoid colliding with a detected
obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer
Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 139.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
A display warning will appear in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and
the speed exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is
not equipped with front sensors), located in the
rear fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense
sensors located in the front fascia/bumper,
monitor the area in front and behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The front
sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm)
from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors
can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front
or rear regions based on the object’s distance
and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow,
to fast, to continuous.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows
the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance (inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect system
Ú page 171.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
within the Uconnect system Ú page 171.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 81. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/
or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear
selector is moved to the DRIVE position, no
warning message will be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic
will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either
the front or rear sensor location depending on
where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly. These arc alerts will
interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if
an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster will display “PARK-
SENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position. An opened lift-
gate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying
a proper parking space, providing audible/
visual instructions, and controlling the steering
wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is capable of
maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e.,
driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, responsible for any
surrounding objects, and must intervene as
required.
The system is designed to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
space that has surfaces that will absorb the
ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have
at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated
before the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic
vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature. The system will also
continuously perform the dynamic vehicle
calibration to account for differences such as
over or under inflated tires and new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system
(LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking
space
Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space
Steering wheel is touched during active
steering guidance into the parking space
ParkSense Park Assist switch is pushed
Driver's door is opened
Rear liftgate is opened
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows
a maximum number of shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within the maximum amount of
shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver
to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE
Ignition is in the RUN position
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-
vated
Driver's door is closed
Rear liftgate is closed
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down. If
the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch.
The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and
then the LED will turn off if any of the above
conditions are not present.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Push the OK button on the left side of the
steering wheel to change your parking space
setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may
switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
Switch To Perpendicular
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular
parking maneuver, the “Active ParkSense
Searching - Press OK to switch to Parallel”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Switch To Parallel
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The system will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular or parallel parking
sequence (depending on the type of maneuver
being performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
When the vehicle comes to a standstill (your
hands still removed from the steering wheel),
you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait
for steering to complete before then instructing
to check the vehicle’s surroundings, and move
backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE)
while keeping hands off of the steering wheel
will be instructed to the driver while checking
the vehicle’s surroundings before completing
the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking
position, then shift the vehicle into PARK. The
message “Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position” will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should
check their surroundings and be prepared to
stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to
the steering wheel to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver
continues to drift out of the lane, the LaneSense
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneu-
vers even when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system. Always check carefully
behind and in front of your vehicle, look
behind and in front of you, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehi-
cles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up and moving forward. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly
is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles
or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-
nize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force to the steering wheel
at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides visual warnings through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic or a torque
warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return
their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off) and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is on to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display and a torque warning in the steering
wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lanes Detected With White Lines/Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left lane line turns solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Detected With Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow
Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you
can configure through the Uconnect system
Ú page 171.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with the use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio
display screen along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 171.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the
camera image will continue to be displayed for
up to 10 seconds unless the following
conditions occur: The vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position, or the user presses image defeat “X”
to exit out of the camera video display.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following
table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Rear View Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in PARK,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE the Rear View
Camera can be activated with the
“Backup Camera” button in the
Controls menu. This feature allows the
customer to monitor the area directly behind
the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to
10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle speed
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View
Camera image will be displayed continuously
until deactivated via the “X” button on the
touchscreen.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
(Continued)
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located under the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice
buildup and re-release the fuel door using the
inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
doors while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
full.
5. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR
R
ELEASE
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use
the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage
bin to the center, this will pop up the
outboard edge.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other
hand to disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door,
push the release cable back to the home
position to re-seat the fuel door latch to the
closed position.
Release Cable
NOTE:
If the fuel door does not latch after the use of
the manual release cable, the actuator latch
should be manually returned to the closed posi-
tion.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear GAWR.
Total load must be limited so GVWR and front
and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load
is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must
be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as
appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items
down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 150.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 150.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs
(2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to use
a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier TW and may be
required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry
standard for the maximum trailer weight a given
trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to
assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
For the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain see Ú page 154.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard Ú page 362. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and GTW.
Engine Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L - 4x2 (Std Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L - 4x4 (Std Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L - 4x2 (HD Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
3.6L - 4x4 (HD Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
5.7L - 4x4 (Std Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) 500 lbs (226 kg)
5.7L - 4x4 (HD Cooling) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (326 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
R
EMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).
This hitch receiver cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at
the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
quarter turn counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of
the locking retainer if needed for added
leverage.
Hitch Receiver Cover
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward
(towards you), pull downwards to disengage
the tabs located at the top of the hitch
receiver cover.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing
repeat the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the Tire And Loading Information placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle Ú page 367.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
Servicing Ú page 329. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating or
Gross Combined Weight Rating.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 362.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away
from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE,
select TOW mode (if equipped), or use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a
lower gear.
NOTE:
Using TOW mode (if equipped), or selecting a
lower gear (using the AutoStick shift control)
while operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
A flat tow electric power steering enable kit is available for increased flat tow performance, contact an authorized dealer for further details.
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck
Ú page 115. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using
specific straps (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive
Models Without 4WD
LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Models With 4WD
LOW
Flat Tow NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal
Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA-TRAC I (SINGLE-SPEED
T
RANSFER CASE) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
M
ODELS
Recreational towing is not allowed. These
models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in
the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA–TRAC II/QUADRA –DRIVE II
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N) and the transmission must be in PARK (P)
for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL selection
button is adjacent to the transfer case selector
switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case
NEUTRAL can take place with the selector
switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indi-
cator light will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL
(N) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the transfer
case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise,
internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, the engine should be started
and left running for a minimum of 60
seconds (with all the doors closed) at least
once every 24 hours. This process allows the
air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride
height to compensate for temperature
effects.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for four seconds. The light behind
the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM
IN NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
instrument cluster.
NEUTRAL (N) Button
6. After the shift is completed and the
NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or
DRIVE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in
NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine turns
off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn
the ignition to the off mode.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After
the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released,
the transfer case will shift to the position
indicated by the selector switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
engine OFF.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or
DRIVE, release the brake pedal, and check
that the vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
NOTE:
Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit
models that are also equipped with an Off-Road
Package, remove the lower fascia to prevent
damage. The lower fascia is attached to the
lower part of the front fascia with seven quarter
turn fasteners and can be removed by hand.
The front license plate bracket must be
removed first if equipped.
Front Air Dam
NOTE:
On Summit models the lower front fascia is not
removable.
Lower Front Fascia Removal:
1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners.
2. Starting on one side of the vehicle,
disengage lower fascia from the upper
fascia. Grasp the portion inside the wheel
well. Pulling it downwards and toward you,
separate the tabs from the slots in the
upper fascia.
3. Continue working your way across the
vehicle, separating the remaining tabs from
the slots in the upper fascia.
NOTE:
Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from
the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to
lower and upper fascia may result.
4. Store the lower fascia in a safe location.
NOTE:
It is recommend to also remove the radar
sensor on vehicle equipped to Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC). This radar sensor is specifically
calibrated to your vehicle and is not inter-
changeable with other radar sensors.
Radar Sensor Removal Procedure (If Equipped
With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. With the lower fascia removed, which
provides access to the sensor and bracket,
disconnect the wiring harness from the
sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire
clip from the bracket.
NOTE:
Before the next step, it is recommended to
scribe location to assist in reinstallation.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the two
fasteners that hold the sensor bracket to
the bumper beam.
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Locate the protective connector on the rear
of the bumper beam.
Bumper Beam
NOTE:
Only models with the Off-Road Package are
equipped with the a protective connector.
5. Remove the plug from the protective
connector and install on the sensor.
6. Insert the wiring harness connector into the
protective connector.
7. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place.
NOTE:
All Speed Control functions will be disabled
when the radar sensor is disconnected.
Radar Sensor Installation Procedure (If
Equipped With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector
from the protective connector on the
bumper beam.
2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install
in protective connector.
3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall
the radar sensor and bracket using the two
fasteners.
NOTE:
Some alignment may be required upon fascia
installation to align sensor with fascia.
4. Install the wiring harness connector into the
radar sensor.
NOTE:
If you receive a fault, see an authorized dealer
they may need to perform a sensor alignment.
Lower Front Fascia Installation
NOTE:
This will only work if you have a helper.
1. Starting at the center of the vehicle,
engage a sufficient number of tabs to
support the weight of the lower fascia
(typically one or two tabs) into the upper
fascia.
2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs
into the slots on one side of the vehicle.
3. Return to the center of the vehicle and
repeat Step 2 to the opposite side of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to apply additional
force to individual tabs to make sure they
are fully engaged.
Do not use any tools to apply additional
force to the tabs as damage to the upper
and lower fascias may result.
4. Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners.
1 — Inside Bumper Beam
2 — Protective Connector Location
3 — Sensor Bracket Fasteners
4 — Sensor Bracket
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the
lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the
current obstacle or terrain be selected. The
vehicle height should then be raised as required
by the changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the optimized height
based on the Selec-Terrain switch position. The
vehicle height can be changed from the default
height for each Selec-Terrain mode by normal
use of the air suspension switches Ú page 112.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If
Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction. This range should be limited
to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud,
or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of
precautions that must be considered before
entering the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing
small rivers or streams. To maintain optimal
performance of your vehicle's heating and venti-
lation system it is recommended to switch the
system into recirculation mode during water
fording.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
you must cross flowing water avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
to allow for drifting.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD LOW Range on dry
pavement; driveline damage may result.
4WD-LOW Range locks front and rear
drivelines together and does not allow for
differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD LOW on
pavement will cause driveline binding; use
only on wet or slippery surfaces.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil,
transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure
the fluids have not been contaminated.
Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in
appearance) should be flushed/changed as
soon as possible to prevent component
damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 112.
Only shift into a lower gear to maintain forward
motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding
and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the
transmission to a lower gear and shift the
transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and
4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brakes.
Restart the engine, and shift into REVERSE (R).
Back slowly down the hill, allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required
to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and
avoid locking or skidding the tires.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill.
Always drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain forward motion by turning the front
wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh “bite”
into the surface and will usually provide traction
to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill
Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid
repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or
Selec-Speed Control use the following
procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the
transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four
wheels turning against engine compression
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
by downshifting the transmission whenever
possible.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion,
or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
4
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
MULTIMEDIA 171
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or Ú page 97.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On Faceplate And
Buttons On Touchscreen
For the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and the
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-Inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position.
Only one area of the touchscreen may be
selected at a time.
When making a selection, press one button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting option until a check mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen
to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
NOTE:
Availability of settings, setting names, and
menu options can vary depending on vehicle
features, equipped Uconnect system, and the
currently installed software.
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust
the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on.
To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting
will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off.
To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting
will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the command list. The “With Help” setting will
show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
MULTIMEDIA 175
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Safety/Assistance
When the Safety/Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access
a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the fixed backup camera guidelines on or off.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will
provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning
+ Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply brake
pressure when a collision is detected.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
MULTIMEDIA 177
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will
provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback
during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and
“High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when
an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both
an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
This setting will provide braking assist if the Rear ParkSense system
senses a collision with an object.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Power Steering Default
This setting will adjust the power steering modes. Setting options are
“Normal”, “Sport”, and “Comfort”.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Setting Name Description
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
of reverse.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is place in REVERSE.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE.
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold the side mirrors. Setting options are
“On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
MULTIMEDIA 179
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when
the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when
the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to open all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that
have been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert This setting will allow you to turn the Power Liftgate on or off.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
Seats & Comfort
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats (if
equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier
entry and exit of the vehicle.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
Suspension
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s suspension system.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier
entry and exit. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages within the Instrument
Cluster Display. Selectable options are “All” and “Warning Only”.
Tire Jack Mode
This setting will disable the suspension system to prevent auto leveling
when the vehicle is on a jack for changing a tire. Selectable options are
“On” and “Off”.
Transport Mode
This setting will disable the suspension system for when the vehicle is
being flat towed. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Wheel Alignment Mode
This setting will disable the suspension system for when the vehicle is
having wheel alignment service. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available setting are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following
settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom,
default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Accessibility — If Equipped
When pressing the Accessibility button of the touchscreen, the system will display the option related to the vehicle’s theater system.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Video Button Readback
This setting will announce a function prior to performing the action
selected when using DVD/Blu-ray™ functions. For example, when
activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce “Play
Button Selected”, and then once pressed again, the Play button will
perform its action.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its
default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
System Information — If Equipped
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
MULTIMEDIA 187
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Climate Button
4 — Apps Button
5 — Controls Button
6 — Phone Button
7 — Settings Button
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 190.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system Ú page 201.
Settings
Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 171.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio
system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
Controls
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated
seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
control functions Ú page 56.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your
preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. See an authorized dealer for
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 395.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
seconds into the current track.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio
Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn
on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left steering
wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available
station or channel. During a Seek Up/Down
function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio
through the available stations or channels at a
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
3 — Status Bar
4 — Bottom Menu Bar
5 — Audio Settings
6 — Seek Up
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Down
9 — Browse Button
10 — Radio Bands
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel
and wait for the beep to say a command. See
some examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canada visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French).
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 MULTIMEDIA
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the touchscreen any time during the Replay
Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the
playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the
touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button
on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the
content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards
the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content
can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, cannot be done for live content. A continuous press
of the Forward button on the touchscreen also forwards the
content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is release.
Live Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing
of live content.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
MULTIMEDIA 195
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The radio then uses this information to alert you
when either the favorite artist or song is being
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located
at the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 MULTIMEDIA
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Team — If Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
MULTIMEDIA 197
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered
button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen.
You can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
Preset Features — If Equipped
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/
Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down
Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the
Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio
button. You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the X button.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every
direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press “Off“ to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
Info button on the touchscreen for artist
information on the current song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB Port, or by selecting the USB
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
1 — Repeat
2 — Track Time
3 — Shuffle
4 — Info
5 — Tracks
6 — Bluetooth®
7 — Select Source
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or
under the Source Select button (if equipped) .
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
is within the first second of the current
selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 191.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to
highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
It allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your
signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command
works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part of
the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of
the VR button or the Phone button on the
touchscreen
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®- enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the
Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent device
paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the Down Arrow button next to the selected
number to display the option’s pop-up. In the
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Transfer
4 — Join Calls
5 — End
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call
button the Phone main screen to combine all
calls into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the
Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previously answered
incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
5 <or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have
the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri
lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone
is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON
mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior
to using the system Ú page 395.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher
powered smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful
information, and organizes it into simple cards
that appear just when they are needed. Android
Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class
speech technology, the steering wheel controls,
the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,
and the radio display’s touchscreen to control
many of your apps. To use Android Auto™,
follow the following procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in the app begins to download.
Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time
you use the app.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Android
Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately
once a compatible device is connected. You can
also launch it by pressing the Android Auto™
icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communi-
cation
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition
(VR) button on the steering wheel
until the beep or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Google to take you to a
desired destination by voice. You can also touch
the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
other navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https://
www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access,
stream, and play your favorite music
with apps like Google Play Music,
iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio
playable application. Using your smartphone’s
data plan, you can stream endless music on the
road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
system’s media screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push
and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate voice
recognition specific to Android Auto™.
This allows you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Android
Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports,
using the factory-provided USB cable, and press
the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on
the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately.
You can also launch it by pressing the Apple
CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition
session. You can also press and hold
the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or
listen to voicemail as you normally would using
Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not func-
tion with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
all your artists, playlists, and music
from iTunes® or any third party
application installed on your device.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply
to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
text messages, but drivers will not be able to
read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel until the beep or tap the
Microphone icon to ask Apple® Siri to
take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible
apps that are available to use, every time it is
launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the
app through your mobile device for it to work
with Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/
carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of
available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
connections to function. The connected device
is unavailable to other devices when connected
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System — If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another
device can also be paired to the Uconnect
system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so
the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
launched from the front and center console
USB ports only.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF
EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED ?
Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are
connected vehicles. These buttons will be
located on either the rearview mirror or
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you
have a connected radio and can take
advantage of the many connected vehicle
features.
For further information about the ASSIST and
SOS buttons Ú page 308.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of
SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection,
transmission and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 242.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
And Business Hours
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/ or call
1-877-324-9091
Uconnect Phone Customer Support
UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call:
1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
(English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Business Hours
Central Time
Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to 10:00 pm
Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to comply may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline
communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
compatible with your device. SiriusXM
Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental
United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and
Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent upon an operative telematics
device, a cellular connection, navigation map
data, and GPS satellite signal reception,
which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency
support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
delivery are hills, structures, buildings,
tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical
system or other important parts of your
vehicle, network congestion, civil distur-
bances, actions of third parties or the govern-
ment, Internet failure, and/or the physical
location of your vehicle, such as in an under-
ground parking structure or under a bridge.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are
available for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and
remote start your vehicle from virtually
anywhere by using the Uconnect App or your
computer.
Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App.
Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map
and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Uconnect App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
The SOS Call button connects you directly to
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email
address to activate services in your vehicle.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
services starting on the date of vehicle
purchase. To get started with your trial,
enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of
SiriusXM Guardian™ services from your date of
purchase.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you’re
only a few steps away from using connected
services.
Uconnect Mobile App
Download the Uconnect app to your mobile
device.
Use your Owner Account login and password
to open the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in the United States, visit
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/
Register button in the upper right-hand
corner to register your account online.
a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification
to confirm/verify your newly created
account.
1 — Settings
2 — Vehicle Info
3 —Remote Commands
4 — Location And Send & Go
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
d. After clicking the email link, it will take
you to a website and prompt you to
assign your account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN.
For customers in Canada, register your
account via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom
menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from
the apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
mation email will be sent to the provided
email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the
confirmation email. It may take a short
time before remote services will be avail-
able, but you will be able to log into the
Uconnect App and the owner’s site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set
up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle
Start, and activate your horn and lights
remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides
you with all the information you need, all in one
place. You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle,
watch videos about your vehicle's features, and
easily access your manuals. It is also where you
can manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account.
This section will familiarize you with the key
elements of the website that will help you get
the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
For customers in the United States, press the
Sign In/Register button and enter your email
address and password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle
Health Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will
then prompt you to log-in using your email
address and password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact
information, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile
button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if
equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the
horn and flash the lights.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail
to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US
Residents) and select “Dashboard”, or
www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents),
select “My Vehicle” and then “Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™”
where can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can
customize the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
in the event of an emergency. When the
connection between the vehicle and the live
agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
transmit location information. In the event of a
minor collision, medical or any other emergency,
press the SOS button to be connected to a call
center agent who can send emergency
assistance to your vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on an operational Uconnect system,
cellular network availability that is compatible
with the device in your vehicle, and GPS
network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM
Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call will NOT work without a network
connection compatible with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
light will turn green indicating a call has
been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or press the Cancel button on the
touchscreen within 10 seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through your mobile
device versus the hands-free system which is
not available due to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
is made, the agent will stay on the line with
you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may
have limited services. In particular, responses
to SOS calls or other emergency services may
be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any
reason (including during or after an accident)
the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
systems, will not operate.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
(Continued)
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be
registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G
(data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent
your vehicle from placing an emergency
call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid
interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER
FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE UCON-
NECT APPS NOR THE SIRIUSXM
GUARDIAN™ SERVICES WILL OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any part
of the air bag system is detected. If the Air
Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag
system may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not be able to send a
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services if
needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
the SOS Call system immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device.
These features include locking/unlocking,
remote starting, and activating the horn and
lights of the vehicle.
Remote Commands
Remote Commands lets you send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and
Uconnect App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care (not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Uconnect App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon
on your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
1 — Lock
Press this button to lock your
vehicle.
2 — Unlock
Press this button to unlock
your vehicle.
3 — Vehicle Start
Press this button to start your
vehicle.
4 — Cancel
Vehicle Start
Press this button to cancel
remote start.
5 — Horn & Lights
Press this button to sound the
horn and activate your lights.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your
Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links
are provided on the website to help you retrieve
them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command to by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to
activate that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command was received by
your vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle
through the Uconnect App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-
bility to protect your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
If using the Uconnect App to command your
vehicle, your device must be compatible and
be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start
and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will
not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
the ignition key is on or during an emergency
call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed
via your Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect
App on your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
with the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance. Once started, the preset climate
controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool
down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not
entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob
within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been
armed and not triggered since the last
vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are
closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank
of fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an auto-
matic transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the
vehicle must be started at least once after
alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
or noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications
every time a command is sent to turn on the
horn and lights.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
the surroundings when using this feature. You
are responsible for compliance with local laws,
rules and ordinances in the location of your
vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Roadside Assistance Call
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
system feature will contain an ASSIST button in
the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™
services have been activated, the ASSIST
button can connect you directly to customer
care call centers. You will be directed to one of
the following four services.
Roadside Assist — If you get a flat tire or need
a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who
can help anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has
expired, and for in-vehicle support for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ system or help
answering any general questions
surrounding your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features,
such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle
and you will be presented with your ASSIST
options on the touchscreen. Make your
selection by pressing the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
monitor your conversations with Roadside
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
of information obtained through any such call
recordings.
Send & Go
Description
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device, and then send the route to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
Vehicle Finder Send & Go Input
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
How It Works
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the
destination.
There are multiple ways to find a destina-
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at
the bottom of the App, press the search box
to browse through one of the categories pro-
vided, or type the name or keyword in the
search box at the top of the App. You can
also select categories such as Favorites or
Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current loca-
tion.
Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app.
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle
by pressing the Send To Vehicle option on
the pop-up that appears on the radio
touchscreen.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or
Uconnect 4C NAV unit.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
LTE Network Connection
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary
vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights
to make finding your vehicle even easier.
1 — Activate Services (Connected Services)
2 — Navigation Button
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
How It Works
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of
your vehicle.
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the
information by pressing the layers button.
These options will appear:
Vehicle Finder Layers
3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see
your location.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
map a route to your vehicle.
NOTE:
You are responsible for using remote
services that sound horn and flash lights in
accordance with the laws, rules and ordi-
nances in effect at the location of your
vehicle.
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network
availability that is compatible with the device
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
1 — Map View
2 — Satellite View
3 — Hybrid View
4 — Show Traffic
5 — View Boundaries
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements
Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in
motion.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever
you are. After you've made your purchase, turn
on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop
or any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets
anyone on your private network access the
Web — great for working and relaxing.
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your
Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an
internet access hotspot in the vehicle,
using the radio as an access point.
The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle
devices (such as a laptop or any other
portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a
complimentary 3-month trial period that
includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be
activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the
How To Purchase button and follow the
instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link
to the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers:
Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an
AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist
you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you
can change its name and the password by
selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing
the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also
view the connected devices from the app
screen by pressing the View Connected Devices
button.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not
required in order to purchase and use the 4G
Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
number (as issued by your local law enforce-
ment). If you have downloaded the
Uconnect App, you can push the “Settings”
menu button on your device, select “Help”,
and then select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
tomer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement
with whom you filed the stolen vehicle
report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
work with your local law enforcement to
locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is
ongoing, you should also contact your
insurance company to inform it of the
situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will
be sent to you every month so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws.
You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications in this vehicle when
it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result
in an accident involving in serious injury or
death.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for regular maintenance to your
vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle
may collect and transmit vehicle data to
SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your
vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins
when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription unless you call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell
them to deactivate your Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/
privacy-policy.
Vehicle Health Alert
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
senses a problem with one of your vehicle’s key
systems. For further information, go to your
Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to
register and activate services. During this
process you will be asked to provide an email
address to which the reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to
remind you when services are needed, or to
alert you of other important information, such
as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK
to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to
speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up
screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the
In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete
messages.
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®!
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly
to your vehicle using Alexa®.
If you need assistance, you can always ask
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands
by saying: “Alexa®, ask <brand name> for help
with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can
ask Alexa®:
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first, register
for SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 219.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle
to Amazon Alexa®:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to
SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account
credentials. This will be the same user
name and password you used when
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™
Connected Services.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand>
Skill on Alexa®!
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™
phones, iPhone® devices, or voice-activated
speakers, like Google Home. If you need
assistance, ask Google for help, or for a
complete list of commands by saying: “Hey
Google, ask <brand name> for help with my
car.”
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
to my <vehicle name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant
app on your smart phone from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google
Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your
account by pressing the icon in the upper
right hand corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle
brand name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
and password you created when you
activated Uconnect services.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
linking process.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a
remote start
Send a destination to their vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel
level and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving
and give you peace of mind when your loved
ones are out on the road. You can set boundary
limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the
Uconnect app to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your
vehicle is driven either out of or into a
geographic boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being
driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your
vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile
radius of a valet drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
To get started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Uconnect app from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
using the username and password you
created when you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your
SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering
your security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
and more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
channel for SmartWatch Integration.
Uconnect Market
With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless
and secure transactions from the comfort of
your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations,
place food orders, or pay for other goods and
services right from the vehicle’s touchscreen.
To get started with Uconnect Market on the
touchscreen:
1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect
App drawer.
2. Press “Get Started”.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your
phone number to receive a text message
with instructions on how to set up Uconnect
Market.
NOTE:
If the text message does not come through,
press the Resend Text button. It might take a
minute to receive the text message.
4. Once you receive the text message, press
the link provided. You will be directed to a
sign-in screen. Enter your email and
password. You will then be able to use
Uconnect Market.
5. If you do not have an account, press
“Register Now” to create one.
6. Accept the Uconnect market Terms of
Service.
7. Enter your credit card information, and
press “Next”.
8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”.
9. The system will verify the phone number.
Once verified, Uconnect Market will be
available to use. Press the OK button.
From the online portal, https://
market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty
accounts and start receiving benefits from them
while still using Uconnect Market and view your
purchase history.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen
to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your call will be
directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held
in a queue until an agent is available. If you do
not have an active subscription, push the
ASSIST button and click the Activate button on
the touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror?
You have 10
seconds after pushing the SOS Call button
to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either
push the SOS Call button again, or press
the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use
the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
Certain vehicle information, such as make
and model, is transmitted along with the
last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You
can use the SOS Call button to make a call
if you or someone else needs emergency
assistance.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take up to three minutes or more for
the request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door
more quickly, however its range is limited
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for
these and other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile
devices, which is why security measures
have been engineered into the Uconnect
App. Asking for your username, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote
services through your mobile device. It is
your responsibility to protect your
passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is
compatible with most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The
Uconnect App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G
(data), or 5G (data) network connection. If
either your device or your vehicle is in an
area with below average coverage, it may
take longer to log in and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
the engine, the pop-up message stating that
you have a new route will appear. There is
an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
the pop-up message offers a “Locations”
option. Once “Locations” is selected, you
can choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is
your responsibility to guard your PIN
accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for
more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button.
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To
enhance your privacy, and the privacy of
others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle
police report is required for you to activate
this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™
locate your vehicle. We may also locate the
vehicle for other law enforcement or
government agencies, subject to a valid
court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
do so. We will also provide the service for
FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you
have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
your vehicle is recovered, you will be
contacted by law enforcement.
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my
insurance rates? Some insurance providers
offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with
systems that can deter auto theft. When
shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ services subscription to find out
if the insurance provider can offer you a
lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle
and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions,
it can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will remote start your
vehicle more quickly. However its range is
limited. For example, when you are leaving
the stadium after the game, you can use the
Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle
and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their
wireless devices, which is why security
measures have been engineered into the
Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
your vehicle if they happen to find your
device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle
using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still
requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The
Remote Start feature simply starts the
engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop
the vehicle.
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and
flash the lights quicker; however its range is
limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red Panic
button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will
continue for a maximum of three minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM
Guardian™ account? There are three ways
that you can register your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Account:
Push the Assist button. A call will be
placed to an agent who can assist in
registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Select the button to speak
with an agent, who can assist in regis-
tering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Enter your email on the
touchscreen and then follow the prompts
from the provided email. You will receive
an email with an activation link that will
be good for 72 hours. Once you click the
activation link, you will be prompted to fill
out your information and accept Terms
and Conditions. Then, you will be directed
to the SiriusXM Guardian™ home page to
complete your profile and demo the
remote services.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
2. Why do I need an email address? Without
an email address, customers cannot
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers
need to register so they can subscribe to
receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for
remote command requests.
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN during the
registration process. The SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to
authenticate you when accessing your
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s
Site.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can
be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your
Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile >
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
your personal information. Make your edits
and click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for
certain Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription
comes up for renewal? If you have added a
credit card to your account information,
your subscription will be automatically
renewed for a term length in accordance
with the service plan that you have selected
at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you
cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind
you that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
12. How do I update my credit card
information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter of no-
tification.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided
from the date of cancellation for annual
plans or longer. Please see the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for
refunds related to billing plans of other
lengths and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it
expires? Yes. If you have an annual
subscription, your subscription will be
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will
be canceled on the last day of the month in
which you choose to cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all
personal information, returns the Uconnect
system to its original factory settings,
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
and account information. To remove your
account information from the Uconnect
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease
vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection compatible with my device is
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services
that required your smartphone only direct
calls to Roadside Assistance Call may be
functioning if you have an operable network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data
which may include information about your
vehicle, your vehicle’s health and performance,
your vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data. The
collection, use and sharing of this information is
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
services and is further described by the
Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents). This information may be
collected by SiriusXM® Connected Vehicle
Services Inc. and shared with FCA US LLC for the
purposes stated in the Uconnect Privacy Policy.
Vehicle health and diagnostic information
including location data may be used by Uconnect
to provide a Vehicle Health Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
information, including location data, may still be
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the Uconnect Services including
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your
consent to the collection, use and disclosure of
this information in accordance with the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared,
you must cancel your Uconnect services in their
entirety by contacting us as referenced in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages,
which provides the vehicle status while
operating on off-road conditions. It supplies
information relating to the vehicle ride height,
the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll
of the vehicle, and the active Selec-Terrain
mode.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen, and then select
“Off-Road Pages”.
Main Menu
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable
pages:
Vehicle Dynamics
Suspension
Pitch & Roll — If Equipped
Accessory Gauge
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in
each of the five selectable page options. It
provides continually updating information for
the following items:
1. Current Transfer Case Status (only appears
when in 4WD Low)
2. Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped
3. Current Latitude/Longitude
4. Current Altitude of the vehicle
5. Status of Hill Descent
6. Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in
mph (km/h)
Status Bar
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
1 — Transfer Case Status (Only When In 4WD Low)
2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped
3 — Current Latitude/Longitude
4 — Current Altitude
5 — Hill Descent
6 — Selec-Speed Status And Set Speed
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays
information concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
SUSPENSION
The Suspension page displays information
regarding the vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
1. Suspension Articulation Indicator
2. Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped
Normal
Off-Road 1
Off-Road 2
Entry/Exit
Aero
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by a
yellow color in the Suspension Articulation Indi-
cator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride Height
Indicator on the screen will switch to the appro-
priate height and the Suspension Articulation
Indicator will show the movement and change
in height.
Suspension Menu
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
1 — Suspension Articulation Indicator
2 — Current Ride Height
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll
gauges provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the
current status of the vehicle’s Coolant
Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure
(Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature,
and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will
alter the image on the screen. The vehicle must
be in the ON/RUN position to display
Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
Auto — Default
Snow
Sand
Mud
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road
Pages Status Bar will also display the current
Selec-Terrain mode.
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System (if
equipped) plays your favorite CDs, DVDs or
Blu-ray™ Discs, listen to audio over the wireless
headphones, or plug and play a variety of video
games or audio devices.
GETTING STARTED
Lift the LCD screen located in the rear of the
front seats.
RSE System Screen
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion.
If equipped with a Blu-ray™ disc player, the
icon will be present on the player.
Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment System
by pushing the power button on the remote
control.
When the Video Screen(s) are open and a
DVD/Blu-ray™ disc is inserted into the disc
player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically,
the headphone transmitters turn on, and
playback begins.
RSE System Channel 1
With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel
1 on the remote control and headphones
refers to Screen 1 (driver's side), and
Channel 2 on the remote control and Head-
phones refers to Screen 2 (passenger side).
The remote control and headphones channel
1 and 2 refer to screen 1 (driver’s side) and
screen 2 (passenger’s side).
The system can be controlled either by the
front seat occupants utilizing the touch-
screen radio or by the rear seat occupants
using the remote control.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
DUAL VIDEO SCREEN
NOTE:
Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment
System:
The Remote Control
The Touchscreen Radio (if equipped)
PLAY A BLU-RAY™ DISC
The Blu-ray™ disc player is located in the center
console.
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Location
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc into the disc player
with the label facing as indicated on the
Blu-ray™ player. The radio automatically
selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu
screen, the language screen, or starts
playing the first track.
2. To watch a Blu-ray™ disc on Channel 1 for
driver's side rear passengers, ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone switches
are on Channel 1.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
3. To watch a Blu-ray™ disc on Channel 2 for
passenger side rear passengers, ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone switches
are on Channel 2.
NOTE:
To view a Blu-ray™ disc on the radio, press
the Media button on the touchscreen, and
then press the Disc button. Press the Play
button, and then the Full Screen button.
Viewing a Blu-ray™ disc on the front radio
screen is not available in all states/prov-
inces. To view the disc, the vehicle must be
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the
PARK position.
Using The Front Touchscreen Radio
Rear Media Control Screen
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
1/Channel 1. This button will be highlighted
when it is being controlled by the front user.
If this button is not highlighted, press the
button to access controls for Screen
1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current igni-
tion cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute
rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock-Out
Press to enable/disable remote control
functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/
Channel 2. This button will be highlighted
when it is being controlled by the front user.
If this button is not highlighted, press the
button to access controls for Screen 2/
Channel 2 source.
6. Radio Full Screen Mode
Press this button to change to Full Screen
Mode.
7. Cabin Audio Mode
Press this button to change the cabin audio
to the rear entertainment source currently
shown on the Rear Media Control screen.
8. RSE Source
Press this button to change the source for
the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Chan-
nel on the Rear Media Control screen.
Press the Media button on the touchscreen,
and then press the Rear Media button on the
touchscreen.
Press the OK button on the touchscreen to
begin playing the Blu-ray™ disc.
Using The Remote Control
Select an audio channel (Channel 1 and
Channel 2), and then press the source key.
Using the Up and Down arrows, highlight Disc
from the menu and press the OK button.
Press the pop-up/menu key to navigate the
disc menu and options.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote
Control.
2. While looking at Channel 1 or 2, highlight
DISC by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right
buttons, then push ENTER/OK.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment
Screen
Using The Touchscreen Radio
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect
system touchscreen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the
Rear Media Control screen.
Rear Media Control Screen
3. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen,
and then the select source button on the
touchscreen. Press the Disc button on the
touchscreen in the Media column. To exit,
press the X at the top right of the screen.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
NOTE:
Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray™ Disc is playing brings up the basic
remote control functions for DVD play such as
scene selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop.
Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off
the remote control screen functions.
PLAY EXTERNAL DEVICE
Connect the external device to the Audio/Video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of
each seat.
These inputs enable the monitor to display
video directly from a video camera, connect
video games, or play music directly from an
MP3 player.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
When connecting an external source to the
AUX/HDMI input, be sure to follow the standard
color coding for the audio/video jacks:
1. Right audio in (red)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Video in (yellow)
4. HDMI Input
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games’ consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power
Inverter.
IMPORTANT NOTES FOR DUAL VIDEO
S
CREEN SYSTEM
The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able
to transmit two channels of stereo audio and
video simultaneously.
The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs,
and Blu-ray™ Discs.
Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the
video source will display on Channel 1 and
can be heard on Channel 1.
Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the
video source will display on Channel 2 and
can be heard on Channel 2.
Audio can be heard through the headphones
even when the screen(s) are closed.
BLU-RAY™ DISC PLAYER REMOTE
C
ONTROL
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. — Turns the screen and wireless
headphone transmitter for the selected
Channel on or off. To hear audio while the
screen is closed, push the Power button to
turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. — Push to navigate menus.
3. OK — Push to select the highlighted option
in a menu.
4. — Push to navigate menus.
5. — Push to navigate menus.
6. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return
to source selection screen.
7. — Mutes headphone audio.
8. — Push and hold to fast rewind through
the current audio track or video chapter.
9. — Stops disc play.
10. — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
11. — When a button is pushed, the current
channel or channel button is illuminated
momentarily.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
12. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection
screen.
13. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates
which channel is being controlled by the
remote control. When the selector switch is
in the Channel 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone
Channel 1 (left screen). When the selector
switch is in the Channel 2 position, the
remote controls the functionality of
headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
14. — Push to navigate menus.
15. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings
menu.
16. — Push and hold to fast forward through
the current audio track or video chapter.
17. — Begin/resume or pause disc play.
18. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access
Blu-ray™ Disc features.
19. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat
and shuffle options, the Blu-ray™ Disc
pop-up menu, the DVD title menu, or to
access disc menus.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
The headphones receive two separate channels
of audio using an infrared transmitter from the
video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume
control, verify that the screen is turned on, the
channel is not muted, and the headphone
channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
the batteries are charged.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
CONTROLS
The headphone power indicator and controls
are located on the right ear cup.
NOTE:
The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To
conserve battery life, the headphones will auto-
matically turn off approximately three minutes
after the rear video system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/
screen selector switch is in the same
position as the headphone selector switch.
NOTE:
When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 1, the Remote is controlling Channel
1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio
on Channel 1.
When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 2, the remote is controlling Channel
2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio
on Channel 2.
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote
control to advance to the next mode.
3. When the Mode Selection menu appears on
screen, use the cursor buttons on the
remote control to navigate to the available
modes and push the OK button to select the
new mode.
4. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu,
push the Back button on the remote control.
REPLACING THE HEADPHONE
B
ATTERIES
Each set of headphones requires two AAA
batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left
ear cup of the headphones, and then slide
the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown.
3. Return the battery compartment cover.
ACCESSIBILITY — IF EQUIPPED
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray™
system that announces a function prior to
performing the action Ú page 171.
STEREO HEADPHONE LIFETIME LIMITED
W
ARRANTY
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty
covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or
"your") of this particular Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”)
wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is
not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This
warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as
specified below, this warranty covers any
Product that in normal use is defective in
workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This
warranty does not cover any damage or defect
that results from misuse, abuse, or modification
of the Product other than by Aptiv. Foam
earpieces, which will wear over time through
normal use, are specifically not covered
(replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY
INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR
ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT,
NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR
OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE
WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation may not apply to you. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv
reserves the right to replace any discontinued
Product with a comparable model. THIS
WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS
PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS,
AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments
regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones,
please email hpser[email protected] or phone:
888-293-3332.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc,
pushing the remote control’s POP-UP/MENU
button displays a list of all commands which
control playback of the disc.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray™ Disc or
DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux
Video, etc.), pushing the remote control’s
SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of
the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so
there is no need to change these settings under
normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote
control’s Navigation buttons (▴, ▾) to select an
item, then push the remote control’s Navigation
buttons (▸, ◂) to change the value for the
currently selected item. To reset all values back
to the original settings, select the Default
Settings menu option and push the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray™ Disc
player's settings of DVD being watched in the
remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only the audio portion of the channel
with the screen closed:
Set the audio to the desired source and
channel.
Close the video screen.
To change the current audio mode, push the
remote control’s Source button. This will
automatically select the next available audio
mode without using the Mode/Source Select
menu.
When the screen is reopened, the video
screen will automatically turn back on and
show the appropriate display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio
heard, verify that the headphones are turned on
(the On indicator is illuminated) and the
headphone selector switch is on the desired
channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio
on. If audio is still not heard, check that the
batteries are fully charged.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the
disc, a "Disc Error" message is displayed on the
rear screen and Radio displays. A dirty,
damaged, or incompatible disc format are all
potential causes for a "Disc Error" message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in
audible or visible errors that persists for two
seconds, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will attempt
to continue playing the disc by skipping forward
one to three seconds at a time. If the end of the
disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt
to play the start of the first track.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during
extremely hot conditions, such as when the
vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F
(48.9°C). When this occurs, the player will
display "High Temp" and will shut off the rear
seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect
the optics of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.
5
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by US patents and
other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home or other limited viewing uses otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP
Lossless", and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Confidential unpublished works. Copyright
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights
reserved.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped)
Ú page 395.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
255
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound,
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you
may continue to hear for a short time after
the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
W
ARNING LIGHT
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB),
Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), and
Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and Electric Power Steering (EPS)
modules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which the
ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The
torque that the steering wheel receives is only
meant to help the driver realize optimal steering
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle
stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to
the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through
small torques on the steering wheel, which
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle.
This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). See Ú page 257 for a
complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.
The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to “ESC On”.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
the customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position, the ESC system will be on even
if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed
off-road driving while in 4WD Low.
HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various
driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed
by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low.
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – if equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For
vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain
active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting using the Uconnect
settings, see Ú page 171.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system will prepare the
brake system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in
4WD Low only. SSC maintains vehicle
speed by actively controlling engine
torque and brakes.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable SSC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low.
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate
automatically once the following conditions are
met:
Driver releases throttle.
Driver releases brake.
Transmission is in any selection other than
PARK.
Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be
reduced when climbing a grade and the level of
set speed reduction depends on the magnitude
of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set
speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – if equipped
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not affect
the gear chosen by the transmission. While
actively controlling SSC the transmission will
shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+
drive mode if active. The differences may be
notable to the driver as a varying level of
aggressiveness.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle
or brake application
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
Vehicle is shifted to PARK
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to
the driver about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when SSC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the SSC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
overheated brakes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine
power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similarly to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine power to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions Ú page 151.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in off
road conditions. The driver must remain
attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F
E
QUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side of the
vehicle, near the B-Pillar, and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in random false detections on the
trailer, and false chimes when the turn signal
is used.
The BSM system may experience drop outs
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle
or any small object remains at the side of the
vehicle for extended periods of time (more
than a couple of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow,
ice, mud, or other road contaminations
accumulate on the rear fascia/bumper where
the radar sensors are located. The system may
also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in
areas with extremely low radar returns such as
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If
blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners” message will
display in the cluster, both mirror lights will
illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not
occur. This is normal operation. The system will
automatically recover and resume function
when the condition clears. To minimize system
blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia where the radar sensors are located with
foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.) and keep it clear of road contaminations.
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors. In
addition, when the turn signal is activated
during the alert on the side of the vehicle
corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime)
alert can be heard. During this audible (chime)
alert, the radio volume will be reduced. See
Ú page 268 in this section for further
information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 395.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is a feature that is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces
where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be
blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started, the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 26 mph
(42 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum or partial braking to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops
the vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles, such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within an ignition cycle,
the Active Braking portion of FCW will be
deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. If
the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range or ESC
Full-Off Mode is active, the FCW system will
be automatically deactivated Ú page 395.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
system Ú page 171.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warning when the latter is at a
farther distance than "Medium" setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front when
the distance between the vehicle in the front is
much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event
of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SAFETY 271
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure based on the vehicle recommended
cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 362 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
pressure warning threshold for any reason,
including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above recommended cold tire pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased
to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured
tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel
rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to
maintain the proper pressure Ú page 395.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pres-
sures
TPMS Warning Light
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-
sures and warnings have been established
for the tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. The TPM sensor is not
designed for use on aftermarket wheels and
may contribute to a poor overall system
performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SAFETY 273
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster,
and an audible chime will be
activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic display of
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) in a
different color.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, BAR, or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the
four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in
a different color on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will
return to its original color and the TPMS Warning
Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPM System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and
remain on solid when a system fault is detected.
The system fault will also sound a chime. The
instrument cluster display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minimum of five seconds. This message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place
of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor(s) is not
being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A
system fault can occur by any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
NOTE:
There is no Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS will not be
able to monitor the tire pressure. If you install
the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
remain on, a chime will sound, and the instru-
ment cluster display will still display a pressure
value in the different color graphic display and
an “Inflate to XX” message will be displayed.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the instrument cluster display
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message
for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. For each subse-
quent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster display will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place
of the spare tire, the TPMS will update automat-
ically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster display will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display pressure values in place of the
dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SAFETY 275
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Supplemental Active Head Restraints
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 293.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 293.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 392 for customer
service contact information.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SAFETY 277
(Continued)
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SAFETY 279
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SAFETY
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SAFETY 281
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 293.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SAFETY
(Continued)
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints
(AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head
restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SAFETY 283
(Continued)
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the severity or type of rear
impact will require the Active Head Restraints
(AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires
deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However, if during a front impact, a secondary
rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based
on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, see Ú page 38.
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic
Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a collision.
Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental
deployment of the Active Head Restraint,
ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose
cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is
deployed.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SAFETY
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered
during a collision, the front half of the head
restraint will be extended forward and
separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle
after the AHRs have deployed. The head
restraint must be reset into the original position
to best protect the occupant for all types of
collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer
must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat before driving. Personally
attempting to reset the AHRs may result in
damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect
you in all types of collisions. Have deployed
AHRs reset by an authorized dealer
immediately.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SAFETY 285
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 88.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually.
You may damage the air bags and you could
be injured because the air bags may no
longer be functional. The protective covers
for the air bag cushions are designed to
open only when the air bags are inflating.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
(Continued)
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SAFETY 291
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
ers cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller System serviced as well.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SAFETY
(Continued)
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SAFETY 293
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SAFETY
(Continued)
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SAFETY 295
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SAFETY 297
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once
the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the
inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat
if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraint may be removed in only the center seating
position if it interferes with the installation of the child
restraint Ú page 38.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SAFETY 299
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat. To
access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. See
Ú page 300 for typical installation instruc-
tions.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SAFETY
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the
center seat position with the vehicle seat belts,
the rear center seat position has an armrest
tether that secures the arm rest in the upward
position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,
first lower the arm rest. The tether is
located behind the armrest and hooked
onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from
the plastic seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether
hook to the strap located on the front of the
arm rest.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 301 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 303 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SAFETY 301
(Continued)
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 281 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint
WARNING! (Continued)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SAFETY
(Continued)
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child
Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraint may be removed in only the center
seating position if it interferes with the installation of the
child restraint Ú page 38.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SAFETY 303
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 303 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See Ú page 297 for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest
then attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible
until the gap panel is folded down. Do not
use the visible cargo tie down hooks,
located on the floor behind the seats, to
attach a child restraint tether anchor.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SAFETY 305
(Continued)
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately Ú page 275.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING! (Continued)
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
6
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the switch bank just above the climate
controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains a SOS
and an ASSIST button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 395.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional assistance is
needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the oper-
ator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The rearview Mirror light located between the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be
illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data
Ú page 395 as authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, to
disable the automatic leveling feature
Ú page 167.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the driver’s front
tire, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct
jacking points. Failure to follow this informa-
tion could cause damage to the vehicle or
underbody components.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
JACK LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in the rear cargo area, below the load
floor.
Load Floor
Spare Tire/Jack And Tools
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE — IF EQUIPPED
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in
the rear cargo area and is secured to the body
with a special wing nut.
Wing Nut
1 — Capless Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Jack
3 — Tire Changing Tools
4 — Spare Tire
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
storage. Turn the wing nut counter-
clockwise to remove the spare tire.
Removing Wing Nut
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts, using the lug wrench by turning them
counterclockwise, one turn, while the wheel
is still on the ground.
Loosen Lug Nuts
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack And Tool Assembly
Jacking Locations
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire as indicated
by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, certain models
come equipped with Rock Rails which have a
different front lifting point location. Also, the
triangular symbols are not visible for this trim
package.
Front Lifting Point
Front Lifting Point - Rock Rail
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
The jack must be placed straight on with handle
facing outwards. See the following Front Jacking
Location images for reference. The position of
the front jack is the same for all trim levels.
Front Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location - Rock Rail
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on
the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of
the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding). Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack
is fully engaged.
NOTE:
The rear lifting point location is the same for all
trim levels.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Lifting Point - Rock Rail
Rear Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill
molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the
proper engagement location on the inside of
the panel. Damage of the vehicle may occur if
the procedure is not properly followed.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317
Rear Jacking Location - Rock Rail
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the
cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque
Ú page 385. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
Tighten Lug Nuts
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
12. Lower the jack to the fully closed position
and return it and the tools to the proper
positions in the foam tray.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the inflatable spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
13. Remove the small center cap and securely
store the road wheel in the cargo area. Turn
the wing nut clockwise until secured.
Installing Wing Nut
14. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible, properly
secure the spare tire with the special wing
nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall
the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for
more than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
passenger's front seat. There are remote
terminals located under the hood to assist in
jump starting.
Under Hood Jump Starting Location
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319
Jump Starting Locations
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do
not touch each other, for either vehicle, until
properly connected for jump starting.
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective
cover over the remote positive (+) battery
post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
(+) Remote Positive Post (Covered With Protective
Cap)
(-) Remote Negative Post
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
Jumper Cable Connections
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The
ground must be away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the
negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable from the remote
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle have the battery and charging system
tested at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The fuel filling procedure in case of an
emergency is described on Ú page 149.
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel.
If refueling is necessary, while using an
approved gas can, please insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your
engine by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the
Manual Park Release cover, remove it by
snapping the cover away from the console
hinges.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the
metal latch in towards the tether strap.
Release Latch
5. While the metal latch is in the open position,
pull upward on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released
position. The transmission is now out of
PARK (P) and the vehicle can be moved.
Released Position
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release,
apply tension upward while pushing the
release latch towards the tether to unlock
the lever.
Release Latch
2. Once the tension has been released and the
lever has been unlocked, be sure it is
stowed properly and locks into position.
Stowed Position
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 257.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OFF switch again to restore ESC On mode.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park
Release is activated may damage the Manual
Park Release mechanism, the transmission,
and/or the armrest.
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed
as described on Ú page 160.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them
down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed
truck Ú page 167. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine
will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over
the tires using specific tire tie-down nets.
Failure to follow these instructions may cause
fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of
proper tie-down tension.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
(Continued)
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged,
instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move
the vehicle Ú page 322.
NOTE:
4WD models without 4WD Low range should
only be towed with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD low Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4WD low Range
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
Transmission in NEUTRAL (N)
30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions
Ú page 160
Transmission in PARK (P)
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N),
for instructions on shifting the transmission
to NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 322.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow
with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed are as follows:
The front wheels raised and the rear wheels
on a towing dolly
Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to
hold the front wheels in the straight position
with the rear wheels raised when and the
front wheels ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a
two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK Ú page 160.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and
therefore must be towed with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
(Continued)
TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can
be used to move a disabled vehicle.
When using a tow eye, follow the precautions
below.
Tow Eye
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
Tow Eye Warning Label
Front Tow Eye Installation
The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a
door on the front fascia/bumper.
To install the tow eye, open the door using the
vehicle key or a small screwdriver, and thread
the tow eye into the receptacle.
Insert the flat end of the jack handle through
the tow eye and tighten Ú page 312. The tow
eye must be fully seated to the attaching
bracket through the lower front fascia/bumper.
If the tow eye is not fully seated to the attaching
bracket, the vehicle should not be moved.
CAUTION!
The tow eye must only be used for roadside
emergencies. Use with an appropriate
device in accordance with highway code (a
rigid bar or rope) to maneuver the vehicle in
preparation for transport via a tow truck.
The tow eye must not be used to move the
vehicle off the road or where there are
obstacles.
Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck
hookup or highway towing.
Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck
vehicle.
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these
guidelines are not followed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
eyes.
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow
straps may break or become disengaged,
causing serious injury or death.
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may
cause components to break resulting in
serious injury or death.
7
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the
front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be
located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 291.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 292.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
329
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Severe operating
conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km);
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Vehicles that are operated in a dusty and
off-road environment, or predominately at idle
or very low engine RPM are known as Severe
Duty vehicles. It is recommended that you
change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.
NOTE:
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace the engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road
or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and
pulley, replace if necessary.
X
Change transfer case fluid. X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading
is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise
the oil level to the high end of the range
marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate
when the washer fluid level is low. When the
sensor detects a low fluid level, the windshield
will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the
“WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be
displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment;
be sure to check the fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will
help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up
of your windshield washer system in cold
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your
climate. This rating information can be found on
most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-
free battery. You will never have to add water,
and periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps Ú page 318. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that
meet the requirements of FCA Material
Standard. For the proper engine oil selection
Ú page 390.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). FCA only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
FCA strongly recommends against the addition
of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar certified filters should be
used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 330.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and/or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris, change the engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Spring Clips
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover
onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the engine
air cleaner filter cover to the housing
assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, the air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. FCA recommends
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. FCA recommends
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement
(A/C Air Filter)
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 330.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
Glove Compartment
2. There are glove compartment travel stops
on both sides of the glove compartment
door, partially close the glove compartment
door and push inward to release the glove
compartment travel stop on one side and
repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove
compartment door toward the rear of the
vehicle to disengage the glove
compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door and lifting the clip out of glove
compartment door.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the
retaining tab and mid way snap that
secures the filter cover to the HVAC
housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter
cover on the right side to fully remove the
cover.
A/C Air Filter Cover
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, make sure the
retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on
the door hinge and reattach the tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to
reengage the glove compartment travel
stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This
is not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks
running along a rib (not across) are not normal.
Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically use a lithium-based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the
parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to
separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of the
wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand, hold the wiper
arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Blade
3 — Wiper Arm
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you Ú page 304.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to FCA specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty, the system should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 330.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 390.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have a authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground
spills immediately. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant freeze point or replacing
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. For the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 330.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the brake system warning light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within
the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure
to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads
wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is
abnormally low, check the system for leaks. For
further information Ú page 391.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
FCA strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not
add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check the
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
WARNING!
Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
Ú page 391. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
voir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only FCA's specified
transmission fluid Ú page 391. It is important
to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct
level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons, the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill
hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill
hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the FCA's recommended fluid
Ú page 391.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than FCA
recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder Ú page 391.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
transfer case assembly should be inspected. If
oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
With the vehicle in a level position, fill the
transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug
opening.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and
fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the FCA's recommended fluid
Ú page 391.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You
could damage them and cause them to leak.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors
with water.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side,
next to the battery terminal posts. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse
is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds
to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan — If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension — If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake Vacuum Pump
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3/Power Locks
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor Front
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
F15 40 Amp Green – Low Temperature Radiator (LTR) Engine Cooling Pump — If Equipped
F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lights #1
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink – Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module, ECU and Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink –
Trailer Tow (Receptacle) / Trailer Tow (Separate E-Brake) / Trailer Tow
(BUX) — If Equipped
F32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential Control — If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115 Volt AC — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
F39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If Equipped
F40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security Gateway
F49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differential - If Equipped
F51 – 15 Amp Blue KIN/RF HUB/Steering Column Lock — If Equipped
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel Engine Only)
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor — If Equipped
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
F59 – 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel Engine Only)
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F61 – 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor (Diesel Engine Only)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow
Ignition Coils / Ignition Coil Capacitors / Short Runner Valve Actuator —
If Equipped (Gas) Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66 – 10 Amp Red
Sunroof/Rain Sensor/Inside Rear View Mirror / USB Port / DSCR / DTV
— If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/UCI Port/USB Charging Port
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/ANCM — If Equipped
F72 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RT — If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module — If Equipped
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power Steering
F80 – 10 Amp Red
Universal Garage Door Opener/Anti-Intrusion Module — If Equipped/
Siren — If Equipped
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTV — If Equipped
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster/SGW/ITBM — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats/Cargo Area) Selectable
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Blind Spot Sensor — If Equipped
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger — If Equipped
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Ventilated Seats/Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/HALF/Park Assist
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC — If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console/Rear Cargo — If
Equipped)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (Low Beam) — If Equipped H11
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) D3S (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Headlamps (High Beam) — If Equipped H9
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED - (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED - (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps
H11
LED - (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker — If Equipped W5W
Premium Front Side Marker — If Equipped LED - (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp — If Equipped 7444NA (WY28/8W)
Rear Body Side Backup Lamp 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps LED - (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED - (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Rear Body Side Stop/Turn Lamps 3157KRD LCP (P27/7W)
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps LED - (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED - (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Bulb Replacement
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switched off and
the key removed. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with (HID) headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back to vapor. Turning
the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing
process.
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
3. The air filter housing must be removed.
4. The windshield washer reservoir may need
to be rotated out of the way by removing the
fastener.
5. Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to
be repositioned by removing the fasteners,
and moving the unit out of the way.
6. To access the low beam bulb you must
remove the rubber boot seal from backside
of the lamp housing.
Rubber Boot Seal
NOTE:
Ensure the rubber boot is properly reinstalled to
prevent water and moisture from entering the
lamp.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps when the headlamp switch is
turned ON. It may cause serious electrical
shock or electrocution if not serviced
properly. See an authorized dealer for
service.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
7. Turn the low or high beam bulb a quarter
turn counterclockwise to remove from
housing.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
3. The air filter housing must be removed.
4. The windshield washer reservoir may need
to be rotated out of the way by removing the
fastener.
5. Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to
be repositioned by removing the fasteners,
and moving the unit out of the way.
6. Turn the turn signal bulb a quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
Front Fog Lamps
Please see an authorized dealer for service on
LED and Halogen front fog lamps.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail
lamp housing.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
3. Grab the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward
to disengage the lamp from the aperture
panel.
4. Twist socket counterclockwise and remove
from lamp.
Rear Of Tail Lamp
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and
reattach the lamp assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1 — Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Backup Bulb Socket
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim from
the liftgate.
Liftgate Lower Trim
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s)
counterclockwise.
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s).
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate
trim.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The (CHMSL) is an LED. Service at an
authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See an
authorized dealer for service.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure FCA’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard Ú page 150.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 150.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
FCA advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire
inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may
be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition Ú page 271.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping
Ú page 323.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed
Ú page 373. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The
Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will
be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 364.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 157.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
The wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing the vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive the vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
LAREDO
LIMITED
Rear
265/60R18
265/50R20
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
OVERLAND
SUMMIT
265/50R20
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
LAREDO
Rear
P265/60R18
265/50R20
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
LIMITED
OVERLAND
P265/60R18
265/60R18
265/50R20
SUMMIT 265/50R20
TRAILHAWK 265/60R18
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 330. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid
or unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The Tire Pressure Monitor System will automat-
ically locate the pressure values displayed in
the correct vehicle position following a tire rota-
tion.
The suggested rotation method is the
“rearward-cross” shown in the following
diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
8
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather upholstery and should be
removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to
avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather it may
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
385
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on a label located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it half way).
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
9
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
“Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will
not provide any benefit over “Regular”
gasoline in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of
87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 387
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of FCA and not covered under
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 389
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
5.7L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
5.7L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
5.7L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 391
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85 with friction modifier.
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic Limited-Slip Differential
(ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be
used.
9
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA
US LLC’s Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 393
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
FCA US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial
1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and are written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 395
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
10
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396
INDEX
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
................................................204
WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................394
A
About Your Brakes
.........................................385
ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control .........................122
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ........................122
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............347
Adding Fuel ....................................................149
Additives, Fuel ...............................................387
Adjust
Forward ....................................................... 35
Rearward..................................................... 35
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................211
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................................287
Air Bag Warning Light ................................284
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................287
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 291, 328
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................328
Front Air Bag .............................................285
If Deployment Occurs ................................290
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................287
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............292
Maintenance .............................................292
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 285
Side Air Bags ............................................ 288
Transporting Pets ..................................... 305
Air Bag Light......................................... 284 , 305
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ............................................................ 338
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 339
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 339
Air Conditioner System ................................. 339
Air Conditioning Filter .................... 60 , 338, 340
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................60
Air Filter ........................................................ 338
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 371
Alarm
Arm The System
...................................22 , 23
Disarm The System .....................................22
Rearm The System ......................................23
Security Alarm ......................................22 , 91
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................10
Ambient Light ...................................................53
Android Auto ........................................ 213 , 215
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 347 , 389
Disposal ................................................... 348
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 255
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................91
Apple CarPlay ....................................... 213 , 217
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 261
Audio Settings ............................................... 197
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 170
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................67
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................67
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................42
Automatic Door Locks ......................................27
Automatic Headlights .......................................50
Automatic High Beams .....................................49
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............59
Automatic Transmission ......................... 99 , 107
Adding Fluid .............................................. 351
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 351
Fluid Change ............................................. 351
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 350
Fluid Type ........................................ 351 , 391
Gear Ranges ............................................. 108
Special Additives ...................................... 350
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 110
AutoPark ....................................................... 100
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 265
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........64
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................64
Axle Fluid....................................................... 391
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
397
B
Battery
....................................................89 , 335
Charging System Light ................................. 89
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 16
Battery Saver Feature ......................................52
Belts, Seat .....................................................305
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................265
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................206
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................342
B-Pillar Location .............................................367
Brake Assist System ......................................256
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................256
Brake Fluid .......................................... 350 , 391
Brake System ...................................... 349 , 385
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................385
Fluid Check ...............................................350
Master Cylinder .........................................350
Parking ......................................................103
Warning Light .............................................. 88
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................106
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle .....103
Bulb Replacement .........................................358
Bulbs, Light ....................................................306
C
Camera, Rear ................................................147
Capacities, Fluid ............................................389
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 333
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 348
Car Washes................................................... 382
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 307
Cargo Area Cover ......................................75 , 76
Cargo Compartment ........................................75
Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................76
CD................................................................. 199
Cellular Phone .............................................. 254
Certification Label ......................................... 150
Chains, Tire ................................................... 379
Changing A Flat Tire ...................................... 312
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 364
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)
................................................................98
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 304
Checks, Safety .............................................. 304
Child Restraint .............................................. 293
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
........................................... 295
Child Seat Installation .............................. 302
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 301
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 294
LATCH Positions ....................................... 297
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 297
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 295
Seating Positions ...................................... 296
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 386
Cleaning
Wheels ...................................................... 378
Climate Control ................................................56
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 102
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 376
Connected Services ...................................... 218
Connected Services FAQ ............................... 237
Connected Services Features ....................... 222
Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 220
Connected Services, Introduction ................. 218
Console
Storage ........................................................62
Console, Overhead ...........................................63
Contract, Service ........................................... 393
Controls ........................................................ 191
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 348
Cooling System ............................................. 346
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 347
Coolant Level ............................................ 349
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 389
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 348
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 347
Inspection ........................................347 , 349
Points To Remember ................................ 349
Pressure Cap ............................................ 348
Radiator Cap ............................................. 348
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
.........................347 , 389, 390
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 382
Cruise Control ............................................... 122
11
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398
Cruise Light
.............................................. 95 , 96
Customer Assistance .....................................392
Cybersecurity .................................................170
D
Daytime Running Lights ...................................49
Dealer Service ...............................................336
Defroster, Windshield ....................................305
De-Icer, Remote Start ...................................... 22
Deleting A Phone ...........................................206
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........................... 97
Dimmer Control Switch .................................... 53
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ................................................335
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................324
Disc Drive ......................................................199
Disconnecting ................................................206
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................348
Disturb...........................................................209
Door Ajar................................................... 89 , 90
Door Ajar Light .......................................... 89 , 90
Door Locks
Automatic
.................................................... 27
Drag & Drop ...................................................189
Driver Memory Presets ..................................197
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .............................. 31 , 32
Driving ...........................................................164
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ....246
E
Economy (Fuel) Mode ................................... 106
Electric Brake Control System ....................... 256
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 255
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 257 , 264
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................43
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........64
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 123
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 257
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........89
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 321
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck
..................... 323
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 308
Jacking ..................................................... 312
Jump Starting ........................................... 318
Tow Hooks ................................................ 328
Emission Control System Maintenance ...........98
Engine........................................................... 333
Air Cleaner ................................................ 338
Block Heater ............................................. 102
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 103
Checking Oil Level .................................... 335
Compartment .................................. 333 , 334
Compartment Identification ............. 333, 334
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 390
Cooling ..................................................... 346
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 307
Fails To Start ............................................ 102
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 102
Fuel Requirements ................................... 386
Jump Starting ........................................... 318
Oil ...........................................336 , 389, 390
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 333
Oil Filter .................................................... 337
Oil Reset ......................................................82
Oil Selection..................................... 336 , 389
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 337
Overheating .............................................. 321
Starting ........................................................99
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 291 , 328
Ethanol.......................................................... 387
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 307
Exhaust System ................................... 307 , 345
Exterior Lights ........................................ 48 , 306
F
Family Alerts
................................................. 236
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 338
Air Conditioning ........................ 60 , 338, 340
Engine Oil ........................................ 337 , 390
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 337
Flashers ........................................................ 308
Hazard Warning ........................................ 308
Turn Signals .............................. 96 , 306, 361
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................50
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
399
Flooded Engine Starting
................................102
Fluid Capacities .............................................389
Fluid Leaks ....................................................306
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................350
Engine Oil ..................................................335
Fluid, Brake ...................................................391
Fog Lights ........................................................ 51
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 31
Forward Collision Warning .............................269
Four Wheel Drive ................................. 112 , 119
Operation ..................................................112
System ......................................................112
Four Wheel Drive Operation ...........................112
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................308
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................323
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................351
Fuel ...............................................................386
Adding .......................................................149
Additives ...................................................387
Clean Air ....................................................386
Economy Mode ..........................................106
Ethanol ......................................................387
Gasoline ....................................................386
Light ............................................................ 92
Materials Added ........................................387
Methanol ...................................................387
Octane Rating ................................. 386 , 390
Requirements ...........................................386
Tank Capacity ............................................389
Fueling .......................................................... 149
Fuses ............................................................ 352
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.....................45
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 386
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 386
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 386
Gear Ranges ................................................. 108
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 384
Glove Compartment Storage ...........................62
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 152
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 151
GVWR............................................................ 150
H
Hazard Warning Flashers
.............................. 308
Head Restraints ...............................................38
Head Rests ......................................................38
Headlights
Cleaning ................................................... 382
Delay ...........................................................51
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........49
Lights On Reminder .....................................51
On With Wipers ............................................50
Passing ........................................................50
Switch..........................................................48
Heated Mirrors .................................................44
Heated Seats ...................................................36
Heated Steering Wheel .............................28 , 29
Heater, Engine Block ..................................... 102
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 260
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 260
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 261
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 153
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................45
Hood
Closing
.........................................................72
Opening .......................................................72
Hood Prop ........................................................72
Hood Release ...................................................72
I
Ignition .............................................................18
Switch ..........................................................18
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 42 , 308
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
.................................................96
Display .........................................................80
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................82
Menu Items .................................................83
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 384
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 383
Interior Lights ...................................................52
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................53
Inverter
Power
...........................................................66
11
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400
iPod Control
.....................................................63
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................... 63
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ......................... 63
J
Jack Location .................................................313
Jack Operation ..................................... 312 , 314
Jacking Instructions .......................................314
Jump Starting ................................................318
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
.......................................... 22
Disarm The System ..................................... 22
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 17
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry)
............................................................... 16
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry)
............................................................... 17
Keyless Enter-N-Go .......................................... 24
Passive Entry ............................................... 24
Keys................................................................. 15
Replacement ............................................... 17
L
Lane Change Assist
......................................... 51
LaneSense ....................................................144
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................277
Latches..........................................................306
Hood ........................................................... 72
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 386
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 306
Life Of Tires ................................................... 374
Liftgate ............................................................73
Closing.........................................................73
Opening .......................................................73
Power ..........................................................74
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................55
Light Bulbs .................................................... 306
Lights ............................................................ 306
Air Bag ............................................. 284 , 305
Ambient .......................................................53
Automatic Headlights ..................................50
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 259
Brake Warning .............................................88
Bulb Replacement .................................... 358
Courtesy/Reading .......................................52
Cruise ...................................................95 , 96
Daytime Running .........................................49
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................53
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator ..................................................90
Exterior ...............................................48 , 306
Fog ..............................................................51
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 308
Headlights On With Wipers ..........................50
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................49
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 260
Interior.........................................................52
Lights On Reminder .....................................51
Low Fuel ......................................................92
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........92
Map .............................................................52
Park ......................................................50 , 95
Passing ........................................................50
Reading .......................................................52
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................90
Security Alarm .............................................91
Service...................................................... 358
Side Marker .............................................. 361
Traction Control ........................................ 259
Turn Signals ....................... 51 , 96, 306, 361
Vanity Mirror ................................................42
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
.....................................90 , 96
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ........................86
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................86
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............86
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ...............86
Loading Vehicle ............................................. 150
Tires.......................................................... 367
Locks
Automatic Door ............................................27
Child Protection ...........................................27
Power Door ..................................................24
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 342
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 385
Luggage Carrier ................................................77
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
401
M
Maintenance
............................................ 70 , 72
Maintenance Free Battery .............................335
Maintenance Schedule ..................................329
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..... 92
Manual
Service ......................................................394
Media Mode ..................................................199
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .................... 30
Memory Seat ................................................... 30
Methanol .......................................................387
Mirrors ............................................................. 42
Automatic Dimming ..................................... 42
Electric Remote ........................................... 43
Exterior Folding ........................................... 43
Heated ........................................................ 44
Outside........................................................ 43
Rearview ............................................42 , 308
Vanity .......................................................... 42
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
........................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................271
Mopar Parts ...................................................394
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 49
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
..........................103
O
Occupant Restraints
......................................275
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 386
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 337
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 337
Oil Pressure Light .............................................90
Oil Reset ..........................................................82
Oil, Engine............................................ 336 , 390
Capacity.................................................... 389
Checking................................................... 335
Dipstick .................................................... 335
Disposal ................................................... 337
Filter ................................................ 337 , 390
Filter Disposal ........................................... 337
Identification Logo .................................... 337
Materials Added To .................................. 337
Pressure Warning Light ...............................90
Recommendation ............................ 336 , 389
Synthetic .................................................. 337
Viscosity ................................................... 389
Onboard Diagnostic System .............................97
Operating Precautions .....................................97
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................ 394
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................43
Overhead Console ...........................................63
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 321
P
Paddle Shifters ............................................. 111
Paint Care ..................................................... 382
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone ..................................................... 204
Parking Brake ............................................... 103
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................ 140
ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 134
Passive Entry....................................................24
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................ 189
Pets............................................................... 305
Phone Mode .................................................. 201
Pinch Protection ........................................69 , 72
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 367
Power
Brakes
...................................................... 385
Distribution Center (Fuses) ....................... 353
Door Locks...................................................24
Inverter ........................................................66
Mirrors .........................................................43
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................64
Seats ...........................................................35
Steering .................................................... 120
Sunroof .................................................68 , 70
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ................29
Windows ......................................................67
Power Seats
Forward
.......................................................35
Rearward .....................................................35
Recline.........................................................35
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 281
11
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402
Preparation For Jacking
.................................312
Presets ..........................................................197
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..................................................281
Q
Quadra-Lift
.....................................................115
Quadra-Trac ......................................... 112 , 113
R
Radial Ply Tires
..............................................372
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............348
Radio
Presets
......................................................197
Radio Controls ...............................................191
Radio Mode ...................................................191
Radio Operation .................................. 191 , 254
Radio Remote Controls ..................................190
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 54
Rear Axle (Differential) ...................................351
Rear Camera .................................................147
Rear Cross Path .............................................268
Rear ParkSense System ................................134
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................55
Rearview Mirror ............................................... 42
Reclining Front Seats ...................................... 32
Recreational Towing ......................................160
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................386
Refrigerant ....................................................339
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ......................219
Release, Hood .................................................72
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 276
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................................19
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ... 226, 238
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 227
Remote Features, Starting ................... 227 , 239
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................15
Arm The Alarm .............................................22
Disarm The Alarm ........................................22
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 190
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................20
Remote Starting System ..................................19
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 358
Replacement Keys ...........................................17
Replacement Tires ........................................ 374
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 394
Restraints, Child ........................................... 293
Restraints, Head ..............................................38
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ..........................76
Roadside Assistance ............................ 228 , 238
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 9
Roof Luggage Rack ..........................................77
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 380
S
Safety
........................................................... 189
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 305
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 306
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 394
Safety Features ............................................. 189
Safety Information, Tire ................................. 362
Safety Tips .................................................... 304
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 307
Satellite Radio ............................................... 192
Saved Radio Stations .................................... 197
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 329
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................90
Seat Belts ............................................276 , 305
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 279
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 279
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................ 279
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 281
Child Restraints ........................................ 293
Energy Management Feature ................... 281
Extender ................................................... 280
Front Seat ...............................276 , 277, 278
Inspection ................................................. 305
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 278
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 279
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................... 277
Operating Instructions .............................. 278
Pregnant Women ...................................... 281
Pretensioners ........................................... 281
Rear Seat.................................................. 277
Reminder .................................................. 276
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
403
Seat Belt Extender
....................................280
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................281
Untwisting Procedure ................................279
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................383
Seats ................................................. 31 , 35, 37
Adjustment ........................................... 31 , 35
Easy Entry ................................................... 36
Head Restraints .......................................... 38
Heated ................................................. 36 , 37
Rear Folding ................................................ 31
Reclining ..................................................... 32
Seatback Release ....................................... 32
Tilting .......................................................... 31
Vented......................................................... 37
Ventilated .................................................... 37
Security Alarm .......................................... 22 , 91
Arm The System .......................................... 22
Disarm The System ..................................... 22
Selec-Terrain .................................................119
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................390
Send & Go ........................................... 229 , 238
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 17
Sentry Key Replacement ................................. 17
Service Assistance .........................................392
Service Contract ............................................393
Service Manuals ............................................394
Settings, Audio ..............................................197
Shifting ..........................................................105
Automatic Transmission .................. 105 , 107
Shoulder Belts ...............................................277
Signals, Turn ................................. 96 , 306, 361
Sirius Satellite Radio ..................................... 192
Favorites................................................... 195
Replay ...................................................... 194
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
......................................... 195
Favorites................................................... 195
Replay ...................................................... 194
Smart Watch ................................................. 236
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 379
Snow Tires .................................................... 375
SOS Call ............................................... 222 , 237
Spare Tires .................................313 , 376, 377
Spark Plugs ................................................... 390
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
..................................... 123 , 124
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............................. 129
Cancel ...................................................... 124
Resume .................................................... 124
Set............................................................ 123
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..................... 123
Starting ............................................................99
Button .........................................................18
Cold Weather ............................................ 102
Engine Block Heater ................................. 102
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 102
Remote........................................................19
Starting And Operating .....................................99
Starting Procedures .........................................99
Steering
Power........................................................ 120
Tilt Column............................................28 , 29
Wheel, Heated ......................................28 , 29
Wheel, Tilt .............................................28 , 29
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...................... 190
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....... 190
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 233 , 239
Storage ............................................................62
Console........................................................62
Door.............................................................62
Glove Compartment .....................................62
Sunglasses ..................................................63
Storage Bin ......................................................75
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 60 , 382
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 197
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 382
Sun Roof ............................................68 , 70, 72
Opening ................................................69 , 70
Venting .................................................69 , 72
Sun Visor..........................................................43
Sunglasses Storage .........................................63
Sunshade Operation .................................70 , 71
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 264
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 337
System, Remote Starting .................................19
11
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404
T
Telescoping Steering Column
................... 28, 29
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 59
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .................................... 76
Tilt Steering Column ................................. 28 , 29
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........367
Tire Markings .................................................363
Tire Safety Information ..................................362
Tires...................................306 , 371, 376, 381
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................374
Air Pressure ...............................................371
Chains .......................................................379
Changing ...................................................312
Compact Spare .........................................376
General Information ........................ 371 , 376
High Speed ................................................372
Inflation Pressure ......................................371
Jacking ......................................................312
Life Of Tires ...............................................374
Load Capacity .................................. 367 , 368
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..93, 271
Quality Grading ..........................................381
Radial ........................................................372
Replacement .............................................374
Rotation ....................................................380
Safety .............................................. 362 , 371
Sizes..........................................................364
Snow Tires .................................................375
Spare Tires ............................. 313 , 376, 377
Spinning ....................................................373
Trailer Towing ........................................... 157
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 373
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 385
To Open Hood ..................................................72
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 155
Tow Hooks
Emergency ................................................ 328
Towing ................................................. 151 , 324
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 324
Guide........................................................ 154
Recreational ............................................. 160
Weight ...................................................... 154
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 160
Towing Eyes .................................................. 327
Traction Control ............................................ 264
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 264
Trailer Towing ............................................... 151
Hitches ..................................................... 153
Minimum Requirements ........................... 156
Tips........................................................... 159
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 155
Wiring ....................................................... 157
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 154
Trailer Weight ................................................ 154
Transfer Case ............................................... 352
Fluid ......................................................... 391
Maintenance ............................................ 352
Transmission ................................................ 107
Automatic ........................................ 107 , 350
Fluid ......................................................... 391
Maintenance ............................................ 350
Shifting ..................................................... 105
Transporting Pets .......................................... 305
Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 373
Trip Computer ..................................................88
Turn Signals .................................... 51 , 96, 361
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features ................................. 208
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 211
Uconnect App ................................................ 220
Uconnect Phone ..........................203 , 204, 205
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................... 209
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
................ 209
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 213
Call Continuation ...................................... 211
Call Controls ............................................. 208
Call Termination ....................................... 210
Cancel Command ..................................... 204
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Au-
dio Device After Pairing
........................ 206
Help Command ......................................... 204
Join Calls .................................................. 210
Making A Phone Or Audio Device
A Favorite
............................................. 207
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
405
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress
........................................210
Managing Your Favorites ...........................208
Natural Speech .........................................203
Operation ..................................................203
Overview....................................................201
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
...................................................204
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device ..205
Phonebook Download ...............................207
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............210
Power-Up ...................................................213
Recent Calls ..............................................209
Redial ........................................................210
To Remove A Favorite ...............................208
Toggling Between Calls .............................210
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................209
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..211
Voice Command ........................................211
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
............. 24
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 24
Uconnect System ...........................................187
Uconnect Voice Command .............................. 40
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................381
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................386
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................279
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................42
Vehicle Finder ...................................... 230 , 239
Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 234
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 233
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 385
Vehicle Loading ................................... 150 , 368
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 336
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................10
Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 234
Vehicle Storage .......................................60 , 382
Voice Command ................................... 215 , 217
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................40
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard ............................. 308
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
....................................................92
Warnings And Cautions ....................................10
Warnings, Roll Over ........................................... 9
Warranty Information .................................... 394
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..................... 394
Washers, Windshield ..............................53 , 335
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 382
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 378
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 378
Wi-fi............................................................... 232
Wind Buffeting .................................................68
Window Fogging ...............................................60
Windows
Power
...........................................................67
Windshield Defroster .................................... 305
Windshield Washers .............................. 53 , 335
Fluid.......................................................... 335
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 342
Windshield Wipers ...........................................53
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 342
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................53
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................54
11
21_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
OWNER’S MANUAL
21_WK_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
2021 GRAND CHEROKEE
2021 GRAND CHEROKEE
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
